Home

CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

1. M200 1 When the first five digits of the serial No are 03082 or later M10 1 Control program when the master station is operating SBOC 1 SET NO M11 Control program when the standby master operation is operating local station operation SB5D soc 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 When the first five digits of the serial No are earlier than 03082 SW80 0 confirms that the master station has returned to the system as station No 1 Execute forced master switching more than 2 seconds after the master station has returned to the system When the standby master station has been set to other than station No 1 correct SW80 0 according to the station number of the standby master station M10 Control program when the master station is operating M200 800 K20 11 TO TO 1 SET SBOC M11 Control program when the standby master operation is operating local station operation SB5D T RST SB0C 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 Handy Functions This section explains some handy functions of the QJ61BT141 4 4 1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations Remote device station initialization procedure registration function The initial settings of remote device stations which in previous models were done using the sequence program can now be perfo
2. e i i i ei ei eieizeizi izeizei z 5 5 5 531 5 2228228252 82829525 z z z z z z z z z z z 2 2121212 21222121215 515 rere rex ree 11 10 11 10 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS Processing upon occurrence of faulty station Confirmation of data link status P10 Control program Confirmation of data link status P10 Control program 11 11 1 Master station program MELSEC Q Read data link status of each station Station number 1 is faulty Station number 1 is performing the data link Control program using data received from a local station Program to generate transmission data to a local statio
3. 8 22 No of automatic return stations 8 24 No of retries information 8 24 Notes on the system configuration 2 4 Number of host occupied stations 8 20 Number of connected modules 8 25 Number of CPUs that can be installed 2 2 Number of I O occupied points 3 1 Index 2 Number of link points per station 3 1 Number of occupied station 3 1 Offline test status 8 19 Operation specification when CPU is down 5 8 20 Other station data link status 8 21 8 26 Other station fuse blown status 8 21 8 27 Other station monitoring 13 16 Other station switch change status 8 21 8 27 Other station watchdog timer error occurrence status 8 26 Other station watchdog timer error status 8 21 P IR Parameter 8 24 Parameter information read acknowledgment status 8 19 Parameter information read completion SIalUS notare tet a 8 19 Parameter information read request 8 17 Parameter 6 1 Parame
4. 9 6 9 3 Greating Program eda etat tet en rene trt Ha Pr SO RR edere ne 9 7 9 4 Performing the Data Lirik 9 9 9 4 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sse 9 9 9 4 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence 9 10 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 1to 10 17 10 1 Configuring a Syste Mira 2 trib 10 1 10 1 1 Setting the master StaliOn eh 10 2 10 1 2 Setting the remote device station essssssssssssssssseeeene nee 10 3 10 2 Setting the Master Station Parameters cccceccecceceeseeeeceeceeeeaeeeeeaeceeseaesaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeaeeeseaeeaees 10 4 10 2 1 Setting the network parameters of the master 10 4 10 2 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master 10 6 10 3 Initial Setting of the Remote Device Station 10 7 10 3 1 Setting the target station number sss nennen nennen tents 10 7 10 3 2 Setting the regist procedure registration essssssssssssssseeenennen nennen 10 7 10 3 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings
5. 8 20 8 25 System 2 1 System down prevention 1 5 T Branch connection 7 11 Temporary error invalid acceptance status 8 18 Temporary error invalid canceling acknowledgment status 8 18 Temporary error invalid canceling complete status 8 18 Temporary error invalid canceling request 8 17 Temporary error invalid complete status 8 18 Temporary error invalid request 8 17 Temporary error invalid station setting function 1 9 4 60 Temporary error invalid station setting information sess 8 20 Temporary error invalid station SDeCIfICatlOnz aa reet erro t etre 8 22 Temporary error invalid station specification cancel result 8 23 Temporary error invalid station specification 8 23 Temporary error invalid status 8 26 Terminal block sss 7 6 Terminal resistor sss A 14 Index 4 The remote device station is not operating normally 52 5 denen ihe 19 7 The remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station does IW not start Up npn tiere
6. App 19 App 19 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions Master station PLC CPU Command amm 1 Device memory 4 Master module Operation chart for the RISEND instruction Specified station Intelligent device station RX RY Buffer memory Send buffer App 20 1 Stores the data to be written to the specified station in the send buffer of the master module 2 Writes the data specified by S1 2 and S1 3 into the buffer memory specified by S1 1 At this time handshaking will be performed by the interlock signal specified by S3 3 A write complete response is returned to the master station 4 The device specified by D turns ON The RISEND instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device stations simultaneously However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station App 20 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RISEND instruction the completion device D2 and the status display device at completion D2 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RISEND instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RISEND instruction Normal complet
7. essent 4 25 4 3 1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal stations Slave station cut off function eese ise 4 25 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal Automatic return function aenar nennen nennen nnne trennen etre nnns 4 26 4 3 3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station PLC CPU Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an 4 27 4 3 4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station 4 28 4 3 5 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty Standby master function 4 29 4 4 Handy FUNCIONS eui espoir triti LEHRER Lane RAAPIA ARAA EA AR ARTANA 4 44 4 4 1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations Remote device station initialization procedure registration 4 44 4 4 2 Performing high speed processing Event issuance for the interrupt program 4 47 4 4 3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on Automatic CC Link startup 4 50 4 4 4 Communicating with intellige
8. rece ti NI Final station number must be multiple of 8 pw 1 Lm los e sese e Number of connected modules in Total number of occupied stations ST Constant 250 ni X 15 F Return processing time only when there is a faulty station including error invalid and temporary error invalid stations Number of faulty stations X 118 X BT X 1 number of retries Example Using the following system configuration when the transmission rate is 10 Mbps assuming that there is no faulty station Station Station Station number 1 1 number 2 1 number 3 1 Master station Remote Remote Remote I O station I O station station 1 occupies 1 station BT 0 8 ST 250 ni X 15 NI 23 58 250 3 X 15 N 3 295 ni 3 LS 0 8 27 8 4 8 3 X 30 3 X 4 8 295 430 84 s 0 43 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 2 Transmission Delay Time This section explains the transmission delay time the time until data is transmitted 5 2 1 Master station lt remote I O station 1 Master station RX lt remote I O station input This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote I O station until the CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example
9. RWw 0 RWr 0 o RWwi o RWw2 Rw 2 RWw3 RW3 RWw 4 RWr 4 lors RWw5 RWw6 RWw6 o MONUI RWw7 RWw 8 RWr 8 o RWw9 RHwr9 RWwA RWA OE RWwB RWB RWw C RWr C RWD j 7 OE RWwE RWE RWwF RWw 10 RWr 10 RWrit ooo 12 0 po RWWI8 RWri3 to to RWw FC RWr FC RWwFD RWFD 5 i do RWrFE RWE a RWrFFO 7 Address 2E0n 2 1 For station 2E2 number 1 2 i 2 4 2 5 For station 2 6 number 2 2 7 i 2E8u 2 9 For station 2EA number 3 2 2 2 For station 2 number 4 2 2 0 2 1 For station 2F2 number 5 2 2 3DC 3DD For station 3DEu M number 64 3DFu 2 8 11 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it in the address corresponding to the host station number Data in the remote register RWr of the remote device statio
10. sss 11 12 11 5 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program seen 11 13 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS 12 110 12 2 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 1 to 13 20 13 1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence nnne nnn 13 1 13 2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the ERR LED of the Master Station is Flashing or When Normal Data cannot be Sent Received During Data 13 8 T9 9UETTODGOGOS edt irr om es a od aie Ee cR 13 10 13 4 CC Link Diagnostics Using the GX Developer essssssssssseeeeennenee nennen 13 15 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Diagram eeceecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeatenas App 1 Appendix 2 Dedicated Instruction 2 Appendix 2 1 RIRD instr ction App 3 Appendix 2 2 RIWT instr ctlon ct tt reet rep eet ee ea e re el e reci App 8 Appendix 2 3 RIRCV instruction sessssssssssesseeeeeennen nnne nns App 13 Appendix 2 4 RISEND instruction esses nnne nne App 18 Appendix 2 5 RIEFUCIDnSEITUGTIOTI ciini
11. 3 Functions a Operation chart for the RIRD instruction Master station Specified station PLC CPU Master module Local module PLC CPU 1 Command G RIRD 1 Buffer memory 2 Device memory Device memory Receive buffer 2 1 Accesses the buffer memory specified by S 2 and S 3 of the station specified by S 1 or the PLC CPU device 2 Stores the data that has been read in the receive buffer of the master module 3 Stores the data that has been read after the device specified in D1 and the device specified by D2 turns on b The RIRD instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations simultaneously However for the same local station or intelligent device station this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location App 5 App 5 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIRD instruction the completion device D2 and status display device at completion D2 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRD instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIRD instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRD instruction is completed and
12. a E AAS ARA AA RAR A ated REAR RARS 23 2 6 26 Appendix 2 7 R EPASET Instr ctlon oo iir eer tt inland dr ne gen nines App 29 Appendix Differences Between the New and Previous App 39 Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to QJ61BT11 esses App 40 Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 of the Function Version to QJ61BT11 of the Function Version B nennen aa enne App 40 Appendix 6 Parameter Setting Checklist nnne nnns App 41 Appendix 6 1 Parameter setting checklist sese App 41 Appendix 6 2 Station information setting checklist App 42 Appendix 6 3 Device assignment checklist sess App 44 INDEX Index 1 to Index 4 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction For details on making Mitsubishi PLC conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction when installing it in your product please see Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module to use The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that conforms to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction To conform this product to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Direc
13. sse 10 11 10 3 4 Setting with the sequence program Reference 10 12 10 4 Creating a Program nennen ennt triti testet rers trennen 10 13 10 5 Pertorming tlie Data bink 5 noia dp EARN 10 16 10 5 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sss 10 16 10 5 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program 10 17 11 1 Configuring a System sse ennt enne tnnt 11 1 11 1 1 Setting the master and local stations sse 11 2 11 2 Setting the Master Station Parameters sessssssssssssssssessseeeee teen 11 3 11 2 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station 11 3 11 2 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master 11 5 11 3 Setting the Local Station Parameters sss nennen nennt nennen 11 6 11 3 1 Setting the network parameters of the local station 11 6 11 3 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local 11 8 11 4 Greatirig a PEOQEAITIs o inei AT on On er oat n si 11 9 1 5 Pertormingithe Data Lirik rr rt in I erp ene e ere go fe D oun 11 12 11 5 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display
14. For more detailed information about the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual 1 Setting the first condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 10 7 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 8 MELSEC Q c Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to ON d Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 01 and the Write Data to ON Setting the second condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set c Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 00 and Write Data to ON Setting the third condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set c Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 02 and the Write Data to 50 Setting the fourth condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set
15. Command Communication emer commences Buffer memory when conditions are met Automatic update buffer memory Automatic update buffer Device memory Y 1 Accesses the device after the device specified by D of the master module specified by Un 2 Writes to the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 b The RITO instruction writes data when it is executed However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station c The maximum points that can be read by the RITO instruction are 4096 d The basic number of steps of the RITO instruction is 9 steps e The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 27 App 27 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Description of operation error When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction 2112 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used When t
16. Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the line status Line status 0 Normal 1 Data link cannot be performed disconnected Indicates the occurrence status of a transient transmission error 0 No transient transmission error 1 Transient transmission error occurrence SW0090 6901 SW0094 6944 W0095 b15 614 b13 b12 6954 MERSIN transmission WO0096 status 3 51 0095 32 696 510096 W0097 SW0097 6974 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 4 Link special register list 7 7 Availability Available x Not available Online Master station Local station Number Description Stores the overlap status when the first station number of each module is not overlapped 51 0098 0 Normal 6984 1 Overlap station number first station number only SW0099 699 Station number i Wi swo oog9a overlap status 7 SWO09 69 5 0099 SW009A SW009B 69B SW009B b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 Stores the consistency status between the loaded station and the parameter settings 0 Normal 1 Matching error SWO09C Installation Parameter 69 Remote device station Remote I O station 51 0090 Remo
17. 13 7 Thermocouple temperature input module 2 9 Tightening torque range 7 3 Total number of stations 8 25 Transient transmission A 12 1 10 4 64 Transient transmission status 8 21 8 27 Transmission delay time 5 4 Transmission rate 3 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch 7 6 Transmission rate and mode settings 7 14 Transmission rate setting 8 23 Weight x nnd aeuum 3 1 When a dedicated instruction is executed the abnormal completion bit turns on 13 7 Wiring Check pP 7 10 Index 4 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and ship
18. SW ERROR Error in switch settings 1 LOCAL Operating as a local station I 8 MST Operating as the standby master station MST Operating as the master station ERR Error occurrence gt RUN The module is operating normally Stores the contents of the transmission rate setting 0 Cancel 1 Set b15 b8 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Lel e e TITT TPIT SW0059 rate 10 Mbps 659 setting 5 Mbps 2 5 Mbps gt 625 kbps 156 kbps 4 The link special register added in QJ61BT11 of the function version B 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 4 Link special register list 3 7 Availability Description O rm Not available based oorr Oe Forced master Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction cates switching instruction IDEOQUE 650 cult 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Remote device station Stores the execution result of the initialization procedure registration SWOO5F _ initialization procedure instruction with SBOOOB 65 registration instruction 0 result Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the mode setting status 0 Online with automatic return SW060 2 Offline Mode setting status 6601 9 58105 s Line test 1 4 Line test 2 6 Hardware test SWO061 Stores the station number of the host that is currently in operation 6614 Host station num
19. NC DA 2 SLD 3 ire CL DG p 7 10 2 10 2 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 2 Setting the remote device station Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below For more detailed information about the contents of the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Transmission rate mode setting switch 0 156 kbps online Station number setting switch Module x10 x1 AJ65BT 64AD 0 1 B RATE STATION NO PW MITSUBISHI cj Ds Os 7O SD 0 RD CH OFFSET GAIN RESET LERR 7 1 0 0 MELSEG Aueser eap Vs t LOS SE 10 3 10 3 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 Setting the Master Station Parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 10 2 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Input data hold clear Operational settings Hold C clear P g Default Clear M r ion i aster statio Mater station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station
20. 1 3 Local station network parameter settings 6 12 Loading status sees 8 24 Loading parameter consistency status 8 28 Master module A 12 Master A 12 1 1 Master station automatic refresh parameter SettitigS 6 10 Master station information 8 20 Master station network parameter settings 6 5 Master station return specification Information utente rte 8 20 Master switching request acknowledgment esses 8 19 Master switching request complete 8 19 Master station transient transmission CI 8 21 Master local module A 12 2 6 Max communication station number 8 25 Max link scan time 8 25 Maximum number of link points 3 1 Maximum overall cable distance 3 1 3 2 9 4 Maximum transmission distance 3 1 Min link scan time 8 25 Mode setting 8 24 Module operating status 8 24 Module 8 18 8 22 Monitoring time setting 8 22 Multiple temporary error invalid station specification
21. 115H 28 116 117 29 118 119 30 11 11 31 11 11DH 32 11 11 33 120 121H 34 122 123 35 124 125 36 126 127 37 128 to 129 38 12 12 39 12CH to 12DH Station Buffer memory number address 40 12 to 12FH 41 130H to 131H 42 132 to 133H 43 134 to 135 44 136 to 137 45 138 to 139 46 13Au to 13 47 13Cuto 130 48 13EH to 13FH 49 140 to 141 50 142 to 143 51 144 145 52 146 to 147H Station number 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Buffer memory address 148 to 149H 14 to 14 14 140 14 14 150 151 152 153 154 to 155 156 157 158 159 15 15 15 to 150 15 15 Table of station numbers corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 17 to 17B 17CHto 17D 17 to 17F 180 to 181H 182H to 183H 184 to 185 186 187 188 189 18 to 18 18 to 180 18 to 18 190 191 192 193 number Station Buffer memory address H to 195u Hto 197H H to 199H H to 19BH H to 19DH H to 19FH H to 1A1H H to 1A3H H to 1A5H H to 1A7H H to 1A9H H to 1ABH number Station Buffer memory address 1 to 1AF 1 0 to 1B1 1B2u to 1B3 1 4 to
22. Clear POINT Only one event issuance condition can be set for each interrupt program b Set the PLC parameter PLC system Intelligent function module setting Interrupt pointer settings 1 Interrupt pointer start No on the PLC side Set the interrupt pointer start number for the CPU Setting range 50 to 255 2 Interrupt pointer No of units on the PLC side Set the number of event issuance conditions specified in the Interrupt settings of the Network parameters Setting range 1 to 16 3 Start I O No on the Intelli unit side Set the start input output number for the intelligent function module for which the interrupt setting was performed Setting range 0 to OFFO 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Start SI No on the intelli unit side Set the smallest number for intelligent function module interrupt pointers specified in Interrupt SI No of the Interrupt settings in the Network parameters Setting range 0 to 15 Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting PLC side a Intelli unit side Interrupt pointer Interrupt pointer FETA Start No No of units Start 1 0 No Start SI No 0 TITTTITTITITTITITT End setup Cancel 3 Simulation of the interrupt program When the event issuance conditions are established in the master station using the GX Developer the interrupt program is executed even when the corresponding modules are not connected and then the in
23. RY40 to RY4F i Data in the shaded areas in the standby master station is either input or retained according to the Data link faulty station setting in the network parameters Remote output RY Remote I O station Station number 2 RYOO to RYOF E 4 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station RY10to RY1F m 4 fi Edu i 1 Station number 3 RY20 to RY2F X00 to XOF Yoo to YOF do dM bon Number of occupied stations 1 1 X10 to X1F Yita YIR 1 3 1 ed 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c When the master station has returned to system operation and the standby master station is controlling the data link 1 Standby master station output Master station standby Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby master station controlling Station number 0 Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I O station bod RY00 to RYOF Station number 2 E Number of occupied stations 1 RY10 to RY1F peseecatcsecenctelncedcgue E Remote l O station RY20 to RY2F X00 to XOF YOOto YOr Station number 3 Lc DA dbi d n Number of occupied stations 1 RY30 to RY3F Y10to YAE 1 RY40to X00
24. 11 81 Pee 110 m 360 9 ft 5 Mbps 59 23 23 in 2 m 6 56 ft or more 60 cm 23 62 in or more 150 m 492 15 ft 70 cm 27 56 in to BU GEO m 1 ft 10 Mbps 99 38 98 in 1 m 3 28 ft or more 80 m 262 5 ft The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 2 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 10 The relation of the transmission speed and maximum overall cable distance when configuring the entire system with Version 1 10 modules and cable is shown below Local station or Local station or 7 Remote I O station Remote I O station Master station intelligent device intelligent device or remote or remote A station station device station device station Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable terminal resistor of 110Q used Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance ____ m 2 2 20cm or longer I 9 BEES EN Ms Ss 390 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 CC Link Dedicated Cable Use the CC Link dedicated cable for the CC Link system If a cable other than the CC Link dedicated cable is used the performa
25. Network parameters Buffer memory Receive area from local station No 1 Host station station number 2 send area Remote input RX Receive area from master station Receive area from master station Remote register RWr Receive area from master station Receive area from master station Remote register RWw Receive area from local station No 1 Host station station number 2 send area 5 Automatic refresh 2 Automatic refresh f x Automatic refresh 8 Automatic refresh i 11 Automatic refresh 11 Automatic refresh S Automatic refresh 12 Automatic refresh Hd PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters Y Hr 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system starts up automatically On off data from a local station to the master station or other local stations 2 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station The remote output RY is used as output data in local station systems 3 The data in the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the master station and the remote
26. detected temperature value etc 1 1 M 1 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 i i f i RWro 0 0 RWH 1 1 1 15 ee ee 1 1 1 RWr2 i 1 1 1 Poa l LF d 1 1 1 i f RWI3 i i RWr4 Remote register RWr i i RWr5 Numeric data such as i iPro wa digital output values aly ol eite P ne SERER f detected temperature RWr7 value etc i RWrO i ret AME jus nn Rw3 Rwr4 i RW5 1 I 1 1 B abd ex corecES3 1 i i i RWr6 1 1 T Peete ae eee eee eee 1 RWr7 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 1 i 1 M 1 1 1 1 1 Ph 1 1 Not used 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and local stations 1 Communication between the master and local stations by cyclic PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters 4 Automatic refresh Automatic refresh 6 Automatic refresh 6 Automatic refresh f Hr 14 Automatic refresh amp Automatic refresh Receive area station No 1 station No 2 Remote ou
27. 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions This section explains the transient transmission functions 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission Dedicated instructions The following dedicated instructions can be used for transient transmission 4 ae Reference Applicable station Instruction Description section Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified Appendix station or a PLC CPU device of a specified s Master station station Local station Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified station or a PLC CPU device of a specified station station 2 1 station 2 2 Automatically performs a handshake with the specified station and reads data from that station s ja 3 Intelligent device buffer memory i station Automatically performs a handshake with the f E RISEND specified station and writes data to that station s buffer memory specified station 2 5 specified station 2 6 4 64 4 64 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME This chapter explains the data link processing time such as the link scan time and transmission delay time 5 1 Link Scan Time This section explains the CC Link scan time The following describes the method for calculating the normal value and maximum value for the remote net mode or remote I O net mode Link scan time LS 1 For remote net mode LS BT
28. App 1 Faulty stations are generated depending on transmission rate 13 7 Faulty stations cannot be detected 13 7 Forced master switching 8 18 Forced master switching instruction result 8 24 Forced master switching request 8 19 Forced master switching request complete 8 19 Index 1 G H 1 Graphic operation terminal 2 9 H W information sess 13 18 Handling precautions 7 3 Hardware test 7 7 High speed counter module 2 9 Host line 8 21 Host mater standby master operation IU 8 21 Host mode nias 8 19 Host monitoring esee 13 15 Host station 8 24 Host parameter 8 24 Host standby master station setting status 8 19 Host station operation status 8 20 Host station switch change detection 8 20 Host type dece 8 19 How to check the function version and serial No 2 10 l O sighal lists iiit eit de 8 2 ID interface 2 9
29. Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Section 4 1 4 4 3 4 4 8 Section 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 Section 7 1 Section 8 4 1 8 4 2 Section 10 3 3 Section 13 1 13 3 13 4 Appendix 2 1 2 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 Jul 2002 SH NA 080016 D Correction Section 2 2 3 Section 4 3 5 Section 5 4 1 5 4 2 Section 8 4 1 8 4 2 Section 13 4 2003 SH NA 080016 E Addition Section 5 4 5 4 1 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 1 Section3 1 Section 4 4 11 Section 5 1 Section 6 2 Section 7 2 1 7 8 Section 8 3 1 8 4 1 8 4 2 Section 13 1 13 3 13 4 Appendix 2 1 to 2 6 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent Japanese Manual Version SH 080017 G licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS SA
30. Special reay SM o j Dema Specialregister so Dema 4 amp Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed When accessing a bit device specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16 App 9 App 9 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Functions a Operation chart for the RIWT instruction Master station Specified station PLC CPU Master module Local module PLC CPU 2 Command G RIWT 1 gt Send buffer Buffer memory Device memory Device memory 4 1 Stores the data to be written to the specified station in the send buffer of the master module 2 Writes the data specified by D to the buffer memory specified by 51 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by S1 1 or to the PLC CPU device 3 The specified station returns the write complete response to the master station 4 The device specified by D turns ON b The RIWT instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations simultaneously However for the same local station or intelligent device station this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location App 10 App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIWT instruction the completion device D and the status display device at completion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the
31. Terminal block Off the shelf terminal block When wiring cables for the main line side try not to T branch terminal block connector Connector Connector for the FA sensor remove the covering as much as possible ICE947 5 2 comparable product is recommended CC Link dedicated cable uses 110 terminal resistor Length of cable between the Length of cable between the Maximum length of main line distance Transmission Maximum length Ween T remote I O stations or remote dacs sath and between T branches and length of branches device stations x2 cable between stations the adjacent station s 625 kbps 100 m 328 1 ft 2 1 m 3 28 ft or longer 3y No limit 30 cm 11 8 in or longer 4 156 kbps 500 m 1640 5 ft 2 m 6 56 ft or longer 3 The cable length of 1m 3 28 ft or longer is for a system configured only with remote I O stations and remote device stations 4 The cable length of 2m 6 56 ft or longer is for a system configuration that contains local stations and intelligent device stations Maximum length of main line not including the branch line length Terminal Distance between T branches Terminal resistor 2 resistor 1 1 Length of branch line 8m 26 25 ft or shorter R Indicates a remote I O station or a remote device station Indicates a local station or an intelligent device station
32. 300H to 303H 3044 to 307 308H to 30BH 30Cu to 3101 to 3134 Station Buffer memory address 1 0 to 1 1 4 1 7 1 8 1 1 1 1FOH 1 1 4 to 1 7 1 8 to 1 1 to 1FFH 200 203 204 207 208H to 20BH 20 to 20 210 to 213H EA MENT 9 MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number address 14 314H to 317H 15 318H to 31BH 16 31Cu to 31FH 17 320H to 323H 18 324H to 327H 19 328H to 32BH 20 32CH to 32FH 21 330H to 333H 22 334H to 337H 23 338H to 33BH 24 33CH to 33FH 25 340H to 343H 26 344H to 347H Local station Station Buffer memory number address 27 348H to 34BH 28 34CH to 34FH 29 350H to 353H 30 354H to 357H 31 358H to 35BH 32 35CH to 35FH 33 360H to 363H 34 364 to 367H 35 368H to 36BH 36 36CH to 36FH 37 370H to 373H 38 374u to 377H 39 378 to 37BH Station Buffer memory number address 40 37CH to 37FH 41 380H to 383H 42 384H to 387H 43 388H to 38BH 44 38CH to 38FH 45 390H to 393H 46 394H to 397H 47 398H to 39Bu 48 39CH to 39FH 49 3A0H to 3A3H 50 4 to 3A7H 51 3A8H to 52 Station number Buffer memory
33. AJ61QBT11 gt o a 0 4 o o 2 2 a a UJ UJ olg T 8 Z a o A o o alid nm EN gt a o UJ N o gt gt Jm a o c c w w 4 4 00 00 N o 2 2 c a UJ 4 UJ N o 4 2 c o a UJ 4 UJ N 2 D TB1 8D TB1 16D TB1 16D1 TB1 32D TB1 32D1 TB2 8A TB2 16A Bele ala 28 gt g 2 gt gt gt gt gt gt c ce c c 26 E c o o o o e e e e e n e n n n n n UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ Table 2 1 Equipment list 1 4 Description Master local module for Q series Master local module for AnS series Master local module for A series Master local module for Q2AS series Master local module for QnA series 1 line DC input 16 point module positive common negative common shared 24 V DC 7 mA 16 points common 2 line DC input 16 point module positive common negative common shared 24 V DC 7 mA 16 points common line DC input 32 point module positive common negative common shared 24 V DC 7 mA 32 points common 1 line transistor output 16 point module sink 12 24 V DC 0 5 A point 4 A common 8 points common 2 line transistor output 16 point module sink 12 24 V DC 0 5 A point 4 A common 8 points common 1 line transistor output 32 point module sink 12 24 V DC 0 1 A point 2 A common 32 points common
34. Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fra
35. Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of P Within the range of the reading P Bit specified device D2 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data Setting range Set by id the status when the instruction is complete 0 Completion status No error normal completion System cn than 0 Error code lli Station number Specify the station numbers of the local station and intelligent 0 to 64 User device station Gode See 1 and 2 User Attribute code ple Access code Attribute code Buffer memory address or device number x2 Number of points 1 to 480 EM Specify the read data count in word units 11032 User Specify the buffer memory start address or device start number App 3 App 3 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station from which data will be read When the random access buffer is specified specify the addresses by setting the start address of the random access buffer memory as 0 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read Specify the buffer memory size of the local station or the intelligent device station Also specify the receive buffer area setting r
36. Station type setting error parameter MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 2 5 Error code Detectability hexadecimal Error details Cause of error occurrence details Master Station Local station The station types of the module are different from parameter settings Example Connected module Parameter setting Remote Remote I O device Remote I O Intelligent Remote device device Master station switching was instructed to a station other than the standby master station Temporary error invalid station specification and line test requests were issued before starting the link A temporary error invalid station was specified while the data link is being performed upon automatic CC Link startup Forced master switching SB000C was instructed again while the master station was being switched to the standby master station The RLPASET instruction was executed for a module whose parameters have been set by GX Developer The parameter setting was changed without turning the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or resetting the PLC CPU The station number including the number of occupied stations of the Set the correct parameters Set the contents of the installation status and network parameters to match Specify the station number that corresponds to the standby master station Specify a temporary error invalid station while the data link i
37. _ Device init Mode Online Remote 1 0 net mode connect count Remote register F wr D1000 Remote reaister E ww D2000 Special relay SB 5B Special register S w Sw Retry count Automatic reconnection station count __ PLC down select Stop M Delay infomation setting E Station information setting gt f Remote device station initial setina Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 1 Indispensable settinasf No setting 7 Already set Setifitisneeded No settina Already set 2 4 Ready Q25H Host station Ovewte NUF 4 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 3 Creating a Program This section shows the program used to control the remote I O stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the PLC CPU and the inputs outputs of remote I O stations The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used helt ee hapa a R LO CPU AEAEE EEA Remote I O station station number 1 AJ65BTB1 16D Station X100F to X1000 XOF to X00 number 1 X101F to X1010 Sto J X102F to X1020 ane a X103F to X1030 Station SNORT to X1048 w Remote I O station station number 2 ib X105F to X1050 AJ65BTB1 16T YOF to YOO Sato i i Y1 OOF to Y1 000 number 1 Y101F to Y1010 Remote O
38. and an error indicating that the available range is exceeded occurs App 35 App 35 APPENDIX 5 Program example MELSEC Q This program sets the network parameters for the master module mounted at the numbers 00 to X Y1F and starts the data link Station number 1 Master Local Station number 2 Station number 3 station E KM MED station Remote V O station Remote V O station occupies canh i SA X YOO to 1F 1 station Error invalid station 1 Reserved station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station 1 npn Aci eer Se E Refresh of SB SW SM400 SB0040 to SBO1FF are read 0 FROM H5E4 K4SB40 K28 to SB0040 to SBO1FF Een a Tom Sn ids SW0040 to SWO1FF are read to SW0040 to SWO1FF Parameter setting SM402 SBSE B 28 1 SET M300 Instruct to set parameters RLPASET instruction Control data M300 35 MOV 0 D Clear complete status MOV 15 Di All setting data Valid MOV 3 D2 Number of connected modules involved in communication 3 MOV 3 03 Number of 3 times MOV 1 D4 Number of automatic return modules 1 module MOV 0 05 Operation specification when CPU is down stop MOV 0 06 Scan mode specification Asynchronous MOV 0 D7 Delay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M300 63 MOV H2101 D10 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 H102 D11 Second Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number
39. 4 Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station If a connected remote station local station intelligent device station or standby master station is specified as a reserved station data link with the specified station becomes disabled Setting method Set the reserved function in Station information settings of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection Error invalid station setting function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that are powered off in the system configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by the master station and local stations using the network parameter settings Note that if a station is set as an error invalid station problems occurring in that station can no longer be detected In addition the error invalid station settings cannot be changed while online because they are set with the network parameters Stations set as error invalid stations Station number number 4 Station number 7 Master Local station Local station d occupies occupies station 1 station 4 stations Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 R
40. 9 o nonae reis Network parameters Buffer memory Remote input Remote output RY Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Intelligent device station Remote input RX Handshaking signals Such as initial data processing request and positioning complete Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as initial data processing complete and positioning start Remote register RWw Numeric data such as positioning start number and speed change value Remote register RWr Numeric data such as present feed value and send speed 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system automatically starts up Remote input 2 The remote input RX of an intelligent device station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Intelligent device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations Remote input RX signals such Remote input RX as positioning complete Remote input RX when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 RX00 RX01 RX02 RX03 RX04 RX05 RX0
41. BC read points 16 16 1x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 x 1 067 0 5 5 12 3 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms b RIWT instruction OT LS x BC write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant e jose oor poda 1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words OT LS X BC write points 16 72 TU 1 13 ms 0 5 5 12 20 16 72 1 x 1 13 0 5 5 12 1 X 1 13 66 15 66 2 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 4 Link Refresh Time This section indicates link refresh time increase of END processing time at the PLC CPU 5 4 1 Master station local station This section indicates the link refresh time of the master local station Expression KM1 KM2 X RX RY SB RWw X 16 RWr X 16 SW X 16 16 aE ms aE X RX RY SB RWw X 16 RWr X 16 SW X 16 16 RX of the remote input RX refreshed by the master local station RY Points of the remote output RY refreshed by the master local station RWw Points of the remote register RWw refreshed by the master local station RWr Points of the remote register RWr refre
42. Continue i Continue occurs in a remote Signs sol local Retains Ihe receive station with f station setting area from a remote device station WE Ne device station with oe communica a communication tion error error Clears the receive area from a local Retains the Wh station with a ena receive area NN The GX Developer communication communication error from a local data link faulty error power off etc Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue station with Continue occurs me ledal station is set local Retains the receive station setting area from a local station d communica station with a n tion error communication error amp 1 If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions Hold applies here If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer Clear applies here when the RY refresh device is set to Y or Hold applies when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y 3 When the RY refresh device is set to Y for the local station that has stopped only the receive area from the stopped local station is cleared the receive area is retained when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations 5 25 5 25 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS This chapter explains the parameter settings that are required to perform data link with
43. Default Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Online remote net mode pini PEIUS COnline Remote I O net mode 5 Ine Offline Default Online remote net mode All connect count 110 64 1 module Default 64 Device name Select from X M L B D W R or Remote input RX ZR Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R or ee based END i Device name Select from M L B T C ST D Remote register RWw W Ror ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R SB Special relay SB orZR Online Remote net mode Device name Select from M L B D W R SW pare ici iid ee ee or ZR Retry count y Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1to 10 1 module station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select p 2 Roses Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode settings CAsynchronous gt synchronous Default Asynchronous 3 times 0 to 100 0 Not specified Delay information setting Default 0 10 4 10 4 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Exclusive Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word Station No Station type station f t station select xclusive Remote device sta
44. Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Unable to turn on off remote output RY of a remote device station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers 13 3 13 3 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously device station GNU NER Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of remote Check the sequence program register RWr buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters Check the sequence program Unable to turn on off remote output RY of a remote Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the parameters Check the total number of stat
45. Initial setting of the remote device station 10 7 Input data status of host data link faulty L STAO 8 19 7 3 Installation environment 7 3 Intelligent device module A 12 Intelligent device station A 12 1 1 Intelligent device station communication 1 4 Intelligent function module A 13 Internal current consumption 3 1 LED display 3 pepe eius 7 5 Eine Status vnnd rennen e 8 27 LING EE 7 15 13 17 Line test 8 28 Line test 1 result 8 28 Line test acceptance status 8 18 Line test complete status 8 19 Line test request esses 8 17 Line test result ssesesssssssss 8 23 Line test station setting 8 22 Link scan time esses 5 1 Index 2 Link special relays SB Link special registers SW Local module esses IN Local Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 6 14 Local station communication
46. Interlock signal storage devices Set data b15 to b8b7 to bO RY Request device 0 to 127 S2 0 0 RY Set the upper 8 bits to 0 00 user Completion device 0 to 127 b15 to 08 b7 to i RW RX Error code storage device 0 to 15 User If none set to FFH 0 Complete with the contents of 1 device RXn 5011 Complete with the contents of 2 devices RXn and UE mode User RXn 1 RXn 1 turns ON at an abnormal completion x1 The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage device App 14 App 14 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions Master station PLC CPU Command G RIRCV RX Buffer memory RY Device memory Receive buffer Master module Operation chart for the RIRCV instruction Specified station Intelligent device station App 15 1 Accesses the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified by S1 1 Handshaking will be performed using the interlock signal specified by S2 2 Stores the data that is read in the receive buffer of the master module 3 Stores the data that is read after the device specified in D1 and the device specified by D2 turns ON The RIRCV instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device stations simultaneously However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than on
47. L Slave station setting data 52 Reserved station specification data S3 Error invalid station specification data S4 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data S5 Number of connected modules Sets the number of connected slave stations involved in communication Number of retries Sets the number of retries to a communication faulty station MER Number of Sets the number of slave stations that can be returned per one link scan automatic return modules Specifies the data link status when a master station PLC Operation CPU error occurs 0 Stop 1 Continue 81 5 specification when CPU is down Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for Scan mode sequence scan T specification 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous 51 7 Delay time setting Sets the link scan interval Unit 50us 0 to 100 x1 For the setting data specified invalid default parameter will be applied App 30 App 30 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Slave station setting data Setting range Setby The type of slave station number of occupied slave stations and station number are set as follows b15 to x b11 to i b7 to bO qoo Ere number obe of occupied slave stations Type of slave station The default parameter settings are 01014 to 0140 station number 1 i 64 number of slave station
48. Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Online Remote net mode Online Remote I O net mode Offline 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 3 modules Device name Select from X L D W or memote ds EN OR ud RAM MEER Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST ee D W R or ZR Device name Select from L D W or PRIUS TOT ed po TE 5 Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR RENE 4 Device name Select from M L B D R SB Special relay SB or ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R SW Special register SW or ZR 1 1to7 Retry count times Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1to 10 station count Default 1 UNES Standby master station Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station N 1 specified o Default Blank Stop continue r continue Default Stop Scan mode setting 2 Asynchronous synchronous Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information 0 to 100 0 Not specified settings 1 Default 0 1 Setting cannot be performed in the remote I O net mode 2 Setting cannot be performed in the function version A at the remote I O net mode 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below 12 GX Developer C ME
49. Remote output RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Set the remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to D1000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Setthe remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to D2000 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting the special relay SB and special register SW refresh devices to SB and SW respectively specify so they do not overlap with the device
50. address to 3B3H 4 to 3B7H 3B8H to 3BBH to 3C0H to 3C3H 4 to 3C7H 3C8H to 3CCH to 3DOnu to 3D3H 3D4u to 3D7H 3D8u to 3DBH 3DCn to 3DFH Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 214uto 217 218H to 21B 21CH to 21F 220 to 223 224u to 227 228H to 22B 22Cu to 22F 230 to 233 234 to 237 238 to 23B 23Cu to 23F 240 to 243 244 to 247 number Station Buffer memory address H to 24BH H to 24FH H to 253H H to 257H H to 25BH H to 25FH H to 263H H to 267H 268H to 26BH H to 26FH H to 273H H to 277H H to 27BH number Station Buffer memory address 27 to 27FH 280 to 283 284H to 287H 288 to 28B 28CH to 28F 290 to 293H 294 to 297H 298 to 29 29 29 2 0 to 2A3 2 4 to 2A7H 2A8H to 2AB 2ACu to 2AF Station number Buffer memory address 2 0 to 2B3H 2 4 to 2B7H 2 8 to 2BBH 2 to 2 2 0 to 2C3H 2 4 to 2C7H 2 8 to 2 2CCu to 2 2DOnu to 2D3H 204 to 2D7H 2D8 to 2DBH 20 to 2DFH 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Link special relays SB The link special relays store the data link status using bit ON OFF data Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH correspond to link special relays 5 0000 to SBO1FF For details on the link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF see Section 8 4
51. buffer memory of the local station Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Unable to communicate from a local station remote Is data read from the correct address of remote output RY to the master station remote input RX input RX buffer memory of the master station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 Check the number of connected modules 51 0072 Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Unable to communicate from the master station remote output RY to a local station remote input RX Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers 13 5 13 5 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 Unable to communicate from a local station remote Check the station number overlap status output RY to the master station remote input RX 5 0098 to SW009B e Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SW009B e Check the loading parame
52. c Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 03 and the Write Data to 1000 Setting the fifth condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set c Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 00 and the Write Data to 1540 604 10 8 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 9 MELSEC Q 6 Setting the sixth condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set c Details of execution setting Set Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 05 and the Write Data to 15 7 Setting the seventh condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set c Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 06 and the Write Data to 7 07H 8 Setting the eighth condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set c Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the
53. er sk See esa E 1 RWw3 Remote register RWw RWw4 Numeric data for ae 7 eae i averaging processing i setting A D conversion i RWw6 enable disable setting pen Zu bi 1 RWwO i i RWw1 1 1 qp d4 1 RWw2 RWw3 n RWw4 RWw5 mA E RWw6 RWw7 po 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 See ee eee ee esos eee ee rn E ea im incom mm mimm mm mcm mmm ee al Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT 64AD is set to station number 1 Address RWwo RWwi RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 A D conversion enable disable setting RWw x The data content to be written to the remote registers RWwO to RWwn is predefined for each remote device station 4 8 4 8 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Reading from the remote register RWr 8 The remote register RWr data of a remote device station is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The remote register RWr data of a remote device station stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote device station Station number 3 occupies 2 stations Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 2 stations PLC CPU Master station Remote register RWr Numeric data such as digital output values
54. remote local intelligent device and standby master stations The SB0080 signal has the same contents OFF All stations normal ON There is a faulty station the faulty station status is stored in SW0080 to SW0083 Module ready XnF This signal indicates whether the module is ready to operate a When the module reaches ready to operate status this signal turns ON automatically b This signal turns OFF when either of the following conditions occurs 1 When an error is detected in the switch setting status for the module 2 When the module error signal Xn0 turns ON Power ON Module ready XnF Module error Xn0 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 3 Buffer Memory The buffer memory transfers data between the master local module and the PLC CPU The reading and writing of data are performed by parameter settings or with dedicated instructions using the GX Developer The contents of the buffer memory return to the default when the power is turned OFF or the PLC CPU is reset 8 3 1 Buffer memory list The buffer memory list is shown in Table 8 2 Table 8 2 Buffer memory list 1 2 Address Availability Read write Reference Item Description a Master Local Hexadecimal Decimal possibility section station station Onto DF 010223 use prohibita _ S o gt For the master station Stores the input status from the remote local intelligent device standby Remote input RX
55. the CC Link Parameter settings usin 3 d Not supported Supported Supported FROM TO instruction Parameter settings usin f Supported Supported Not supported dedicated instruction Parameter settings using GX 9 g Supported Not supported Supported Developer The master station that is The master station that is The master station that is Standby master function down can recover down cannot recover down cannot recover Event issuance for the Supported Not Not interrupt program Parameter verification test verification test E PROM o CPU parameters App 39 App 39 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to QJ61BT11 1 The following dedicated instructions for AJ61QBT11 cannot be used in QJ61BT11 CCL CCLEND Performs mail box registration for intelligent device and remote device instructions SPCCLR Performs interrupt command to intelligent device instruction SPCBUSY Reads remote station status Sends data message to designated transmission destination station QnACPU RECV Reads data message that has been sent by SEND instruction READ SREAD Designated station QnACPU word device data read by local station data Sends and executes transient such as remote RUN STOP requests to other stations 2 The conditions setting switches for AJ61QBT11 shown below cannot be used on QJ61BT11 Use the GX Developer and set the CC Link network
56. turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program 5555555555 Execution completion of ON the RIRD instruction RIRD instruction S J pn ed ON Completion device r ON Abnormal Y completion Status display device i Normal completion 1 at completion i 1 scan d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIRD instruction is 8 steps f The receive buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 4 Operation error In the following cases an operation error occurs the error flag SM0 turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO the module specified by Un is intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of dat
57. 1 The following table shows the relationship between buffer memory addresses 5EOnu to 5FFH and link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF Address b15 bi4 b12 bii b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b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u BF BE BD BC BB BA B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO 5ECH CF CE CD CC CB CA C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 2 1 co SEDH DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO 5 9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 EO FF FE FD FB FA 8 F7 Fe F5 F4 F2 FO 0 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 SF1H 11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 5F2u 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 1
58. 1 The data in the buffer memory of the local station is accessed 2 The data read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station 3 The data is stored in the device memory of the PLC CPU and the devices specified with the RIRD instruction are turned on Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module Device memory Buffer memory Receive buffer Before performing data communication using transient transmission the sizes of the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master station For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers see Section 6 2 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device stations MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and intelligent device stations 1 Communication between the master station and intelligent device stations by cyclic transmission Handshaking signals with intelligent device stations positioning complete positioning start etc are communicated using remote input RX and remote output RX Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using remote register RWw and remote register RWr PLC CPU Master station Network 1 parameters Automatic refresh parameters 3 lt Automatic refresh 4 Automatic refresh 6 Automatic refresh
59. 16 bits ES Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored M specified device Within the range of the Device name S2 Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored E specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of writing D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Within the range of the specified device Control data Set data Setting range Set by s the status when the instruction is complete 81 0 Completion status No error normal completion System m than 0 Error code 51 Stalon humb er Specify the station numbers of the local station and intelligent 0 to 64 gence station b8 b7 Access code See 1 and 2 User Attribute code in Access code Attribute code Buffer memory 51 3 address or device number x2 Number of points 1 to 480 Specify the write data count in word units User Specify the buffer memory start address or device start number App 8 App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station to which data will be written When the random access buffer is specified specify the addresses by setting the start address of the random access buffer memory as 0 2 Indicate
60. 210 mn s HT M303 Instruct to change parameters RLPASET instruction Control data M303 212 MOV 0 D100 Clear complete status Slave station setting data send MOV 9 0101 receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Valid MOV 3 D102 Number of connected modules involved in communication 3 MOV 3 0108 Number of retries 3 times MOV 1 D104 Number of automatic return modules 1 module Operation specification when Moy CPU is down Stop MOY 0 0106 Scan mode specification Asynchronous MOV 0 D107 Delay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M303 240 H2101 0110 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 MOV H102 D111 Second Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 2 MOV H103 D112 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data station number 3 M303 MOV Hed 0170 First station number 1 local station Send buffer 64 T First station number 1 local station MUT i Receive buffer 64 T First station number 1 local station Woy p Automatic refresh buffer Ou Parameter registration data link startup Hir HIE 35 RLPASET D100 D110 D150 D160 170 M204 Dedicated instruction Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M304 RST M303 Turn the parameter setting instruction off SET 583 Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET
61. 27 NI X 4 8 NW X 9 6 X 30 ni X 4 8 nw X 9 6 ST F TR us BT Constant transmission rate 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps ar s me a2 16 NI The final station number in a b and c 5 It includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 a Total number of stations occupied for remote I O stations b Total number of stations occupied for remote device stations c Total number of stations occupied for local stations standby master station and intelligent device stations NW The final station number in b and c Includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 te 20 so 40 4b sb amp Number of connected stations excluding reserved stations i a b c excluding reserved stations nw b c excluding reserved stations ST Constant A Last station number of remote I O stations B Last station number of remote device stations including the number of occupied stations C Last station number of local standby master and intelligent device stations including the number of occupied stations The largest value found in 1 to 3 below However 2 is disregarded when B 0 and 3 is disregarded when C 0 1 800 A X 15 2 900 B X 50 3 For C x 26 1200 C X 100 For C gt 26 3700 C 26 X 25 F Return processing ti
62. 27 194 to 195H 28 196 to 197H 29 198 to 199H 30 19 to 19BH 31 19CH to 19DH 32 19 to 19FH 33 1A0H to 1A1H 34 1 2 to 1A3H 35 1 4 to 1A5H 36 1 to 1A7H 37 1A8H to 1A9H 38 1 to 1ABH 39 1ACH to 1ADH Station Buffer memory number address 40 1AEH to 1AFH 41 1BOH to 1B1H 42 1 2 to 1B3H 43 1 4 to 1 5 44 1B6H 1B7H 45 1 8 1 9 46 1 1 47 1BCuto 1 0 48 1BEuto 1BFH 49 1 0 1 1 50 1C2H to 1C3H 51 1 4 to 1 5 52 1C6uto 1C7H Station number 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Buffer memory address 1 8 to 1 9 1 1 1CCH 1 to 1CFH 1DOnu to 1D1H 1D2u to 1D3H 104 to 105 1D6u to 1D7H 108 to 1D9H 1DAu 1DBH 1DCH 1 to 1DFH O T I Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address FAH to to FDH FEH to FFH 100 to 101H 102H to 103H 104 to 105 106 to 107 108 109 10 to 10BH 10 100 10 to10FH 110 111 112 113 number Station Buffer memory address H to 115 H to 117H H to 119H H to 11BH H to 11Du H to 11 H to 121H H to 123H H to 125H H to 127H H to 129H H to 12 H to 12DH number Station Buffer memory address 12 to 12F 130 to 131 132 to 133 134 to
63. 50 cm 19 69 in 2 Fora system consisting of remote I O stations remote device stations local stations and intelligent device stations Local station Local station Master station Remote I O station Remote I O station or intelligent or intelligent or remote 9t remote device station device station device station device station 2 2 2 gt Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations 2 Cable length between the master station or the local or intelligent device station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Q Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable DT distance 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 360 30 cm 11 81 in to 5 Mbps 1 110 m 360 9 ft 59 cm 23 23 in J 60 cm 23 62 in or more 2 m 6 56 ft or more 150 m 492 15 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 59 cm 23 23 in 10 Mbps m 60 cm 23 62 in to 80 m 262 5 ft 99 cm 38 98 1 3 28 ft or more 100 m 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Up distance 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 1 30
64. 81 4 81 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used The following shows an overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used a When the master station controls the data link 1 Master station output Standby master station standby Station number 1 Station number 2 pese Number of occupied stations 1 Master station controlling Number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote Remote output RY input RX output RY Remote I O station Remote I O station YOO to YOF i Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 1 1 to AX4F 464e RAFI aane 1 invio idc 1 e Y10 to Y1F Data sent from the master station to the remote input RX and remote register RWr in the standby master station shown by the shaded areas in the figure above is used as output data when the master station becomes faulty it should be saved in another device using the sequence program When the master station becomes faulty the saved data is transferred to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station using the sequence program 2 Master station input Standby master station standby Station number 1 Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3
65. D7 D10 011 012 050 060 070 071 D72 M301 M300 583 M310 5 2 MELSEC Q SB0040 to SBO1FF are read to SB0040 to SBO1FF SW0040 to SWO1FF are read to SW0040 to SWO1FF Instruct to set parameters Clear complete status All setting data Valid Number of connected modules involved in communication 3 Number of retries 3 times Number of automatic return modules 1 module Operation specification when CPU is down stop Scan mode specification Asynchronous Delay time setting 0 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 Second Remote l O station occupies 1 station station number 2 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 3 Reserved station specification station number 3 Error invalid station specification station number 2 First station number 1 local station Send buffer 644 First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 641 First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer Dedicated instruction RLRASET Turn the parameter setting instruction off Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction Instruct to start the control program at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction Instruct to stop data link 6 18 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q SB45 206 RST SB2 Turn the data link stop instruction off RST SB3 Instruct to stop refreshing SB45
66. Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to ON 9 Setting the ninth condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set c Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to ON 10 Setting the tenth condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 10 9 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q c Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to OFF d Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to OFF 11 Setting the eleventh condition a Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute b Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new c Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 19 and the Execute Condition to ON d Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to OFF 12 Setting results The results of settings 1 to 11 are shown below Remote device stati
67. Mode of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 5 Speeding up the response from remote I O stations Remote I O net mode The remote I O net mode can be used for a system consisting of only the master station and remote I O stations The remote I O net mode allows cyclic transmission at high speed thus shortening the link scan time The table below lists the link scan times for both the remote I O net mode and the remote net mode Number of stations Remote I O net mode Remote net mode 0 65 ms 1 2 ms 64 3 3 ms 3 8 ms Transmission rate at 10 Mbps Setting method Set the remote I O net mode in Mode of the network parameters using GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future Reserved station function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that are not actually connected but to be connected in the future from being treated as data link faulty stations by the master station and local stations Station that will be connected in the future Reserved station Station number 4 3 1 i 1 Localstation ae occupies Reserved station Station number 1 Station number3 lt 8809 Station number 8 Station number 10 1
68. NUM 11 7 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local station 11 8 1 Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below a Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 b Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 c Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to D1000 d Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to D2000 e Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO f Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting the refresh devices for special relay SB and special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not overlap with device numbers used in the MELSECNET H network 2 Setting example A setting example is shown below i MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Z Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help lal Os gi S amp amp e 415 ele Program zil mre eal 20 Fa a 7 g J rs cra ceio sez era zoe Eel z amp 050301 Local station 8 Program No of boards in 1 rj Boards Blank no settin
69. O station when the data link is being performed normally 1 LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11 The data link is being performed g normally RUN e L RUN Controlling data link MST S MST SD RD j Receiving data Sending data ERR LERR o 2 LED display of the remote I O station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status w o O Off AJ65BTB1 16D PW LRUN SD RD LERR o 24 V is being supplied The data link is being performed normally Sending data Receiving data 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 4 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 For example when X00 of the remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16D station number 1 is turned on 40 QY41P of the master station turns on 2 When X21 QX41 of the master station is turned on YO8 of the remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16DT station Number 3 turns on station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QJ61BT11 mJ B au resistor Remote I O station station number 1 Remote I O station A 27 number 2 Remote I O station number 3 5 1 167 7 16T MJe5BTB
70. Processing upon detection of Y50 Station number 1 is faulty faulty station P10 Station number 1 is Confirmation of data link status performing the data link P10 Initial procedure registration OFF SET 5800 Initial procedure registration instruction X101B 1000 BMOV 01000 01500 X1001 S D1001 01501 KI Read digital output value X1002 BMOV D1002 D1502 K1 BMOV D1004 D1504 Ki Read error code and reset error flag ct 2 gt 10 15 10 15 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 5 Performing the Data Link Turn on the power to the remote device station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 10 5 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally 1 LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on OO Off Module is normal QJ61BT11 The data link is being performed normally L RUN S MST RUN e Controlling data link MST SD RD j Receiving data Sending data ERR LERR o 2 LED display of the remote device station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status 24 V DC is being supplied AJ65BT 64AD PW e RUN LRUN
71. Q 1 2 Features The features of the CC Link are described below 1 Remote I O station communication The ON OFF status of a switch or indicator lamp is communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY see Section 4 2 1 PLC CPU Master station Remote I O station Automatic refresh Link scan X Remote input Input ots RX Automatic refresh Remote output Link scan Output m RY 2 Remote device station communication Signals for handshaking with the remote device station initial request error occurred flag etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY The setting data to the remote device station are communicated using remote registers RWw and RWr see Section 4 2 2 PLC CPU Master station Remote device station Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote X input input RX RX Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote Y gt output gt Output RY RY Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote register register RWw RWw Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote register register A RWr RWr Voltmeter 1 OVERVIEW 3 Local station communication Communication between the master station and the local station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission see Section 4 2 3 a Cyclic transmission Data communi
72. Remote input RX and remote output RY 8 Master station lt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored Two words are used per station 2 Local station Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output RY of the address corresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored Two words are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote I O station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 i 1 I 1 1 Address Remote input RX i Remote output RY Address 1 1 f 1 1 1 For station f RX Fto RXO NE XOF io X00 NY 160 For station number 1 Etu RX fF to AX 10 RR XIF to X10 EE 1614 numberi For station 2 1624 For station number 2 i i 1634 number2 For station 4 1644 For station number3 E54 bd A 165 number3 1 For station 1664 For station number 4 E7u 1674 number 4
73. Sets the CPU response monitoring time when the CPU is accessed with a dedicated instruction SW000A CPU monitoring time Default value 90 seconds 60 setting Setting range 0 to 3600 seconds The monitoring time of 3600 seconds will be used if a value outside of the above setting range is specified swo020 Indicates the module status 620s Module status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the execution result of the data link restart instruction with SM 001 Data link restart result 6414 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby master Refresh instruction at 5 0043 et ndby master Switching MS result Q soma g Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 8 22 8 22 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 4 Link special register list 2 7 Availability clt Available x Not available necs Piin A Offline Master station Local station Stores the execution result of the data link stop instruction with pA Data link stop result aia 6451 P 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates the execution result of temporary error invalid station Temporary error an SW0049 invalid station specification 649 specification result Romal p Other than 0 Stores
74. Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan Default value Asynchronous Section 4 4 8 Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Sets the link scan interval Unit 50 u s Delay time setting Default value 0 Not specified Setting range 0 to 100 0 Not specified Specifies the reserved station Reserved station Default value Not specified Section 4 4 6 specification Setting range Not specified Specified Specifies the error invalid station Error invalid station Default value Not specified HON a Section 4 4 7 specification Setting range Not specified Specified 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Table 6 1 Parameter setting items 2 2 Sets the type of the connected remote station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Default value Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 1 to Remote I O station NC occupies 1 station station number 64 Station information Setting range Station type Remote I O station remote device station intelligent device station Number of occupied stations occupies 1 station to occupies 4 stations Station number 1 to 64 Specifies the assignments of buffer memory sizes during transient transmission to a local station a standby master station and an intelligent device station Default values Send buffer size 40H 64 word Receive buffer size 40H 64 word Automatic update
75. The data link is being SD performed normally RD Seal SG Sending data LERR Receiving data 10 16 10 16 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 5 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program 10 17 Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 Change the voltage input to the AJ65BT 64AD and confirm that the A D converted digital value also changes 1 A D conversion of 5 64 D1500 CH 1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value D1502 CH3 Digital output value Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QJ61BT11 ii resistor Occupies 2 stations Remote device station station number 1 AJ65BT 64AD SOOO Co A D conversion module Terminal resistor 10 17 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11 1 Configuring a System This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation check using a system configuration example As shown below a system with one connected local station is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QJe1BT11 QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Local station station number 1 occ
76. When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20 1 1 1 5 21 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS x 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master
77. X 4 54 X B 88 X C S 2304 Set the parameter so that it A Number of remote stations meets the condition shown on B Number of remote device stations left C Number of intelligent device stations including local stations The number of occupied stations in the station information parameter was set to a value other than 1 to 4 The number of connected modules parameter was set to a value other than the range Number of connected modules 1 to 64 setting error parameter The remote net ver 2 mode remote net Set to the remote net ver 1 additional mode has been set to the mode remote I O net mode master station of the QJ61BT11 ud Change the parameter setting ung 5 00y lof the master station or change master station differs from that set in the the station number setting of standby master station No network the local standb parameter of the master station or the 1 y station and then reset the PLC station set in the standby master station CPU of the local standby No network parameter of the master master station station is a local station B39B Reserved station setting error All stations were set as reserved stations reserved station a The station number designated for the B39C Standby master station setting standby master station is specified to a Specify Salle c error station other than an intelligent device station station Station info
78. basic number of steps of the RIFR instruction is 9 steps e The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 24 App 24 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Description of operation error 2412 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the setting for number of points to read n3 is outside of the setting range When the station number specified with n1 does not exist 3 Program example Master module Intelligent device station PLC CPU Start I O number 40 Station number 1 Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory 300u Automatic update buffer memory 5FFH When XO is turned ON the following example program reads 10 word data to DO or succeeding addresses from the automatic update buffer offset value of 100 400 of the intelligent device station in the master module When the link special register SW refresh devic
79. buffer size 80H 128 word Setting range Communication buffer size OH 0 word Not specified or 40H 64 word to 1000u 4096 word However the total communication buffer size must be 1000H 4096 word or less Automatic update buffer OH 0 word Not specified or 80H 128 word to 1000H 4096 word However the total automatic buffer size must be 1000H 4096 word or less Assignments of communication buffer and automatic update buffer For the communication buffer size specify the size that is calculated by adding seven words to the data size to be sent or received For the automatic update buffer size specify the size required for each intelligent device station When performing the parameter setting with the dedicated instruction Standby master station specification cannot be set The network parameters other than operational settings and mode setting are also made valid when the PLC CPU is switched from STOP to RUN 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station number 4 Station Station Station Station number 9 Master number 1 number 2 Local station number 8 Intelligent stat
80. data link control from the standby master pow fo station that is controlling the data link to the standby master station in case the standby master station becomes faulty OFF Not requested ON Requested SB000C 5 0 b12 Forced master switching SB000D 5 0 b13 SB0020 5E2x b0 SB0040 5E4n SB0041 4 b1 SB0042 5E4n b2 SB0043 5E4n b3 SB0044 5E4n b4 SB0045 5E4n b5 SB0046 BE44 b6 80048 E44 b8 80049 E44 b9 SBO04A 4 b10 SB004B 5 4 b11 SB004C 5 4 b12 Starts the initial processing using the information registered during the Remote device station initialization procedure registration e aca While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and 1 initialization procedure Qum x SM remote registers stops registration instruction OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Module status Data link restart acceptance Data link restart complete Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at standby master switching Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching Data link stop acceptance Data link stop complete 3 Forced master switching executable status Temporary error invalid acceptance status Temporary error invalid complete status Temporary error invalid canceling acknowledgment status Temporary error invalid canceling complete status Line
81. for the PLC CPU Check the error code for the master station Has an error occurred Check the operation status of the PLC CPUs for both the master station and the corresponding local station TE Are there any errors in the initial settings of the Check the parameters The remote device station is not operating normally remote device station e Check the sequence program When multiple remote stations are powered off at Increase the transmission rate Wh h ng for the retr nt 156 kbps the L RUN LED goes off temporarily abe De setting count e Reduce the retry count Has a value been set for the intelligent function Disable the intelligent function modul itch in CC Link cannot be started automatically S 9 ss Tig inteligent tuncuon module switch setting module switch setting of GX Developer Is the switch 4 setting of the intelligent function Set switch 4 of the intelligent function module switch module switch settings correct settings of GX Developer to 01004 Check the error code for the PLC CPU Are the various settings specified by the RLPASET e Check the error code for the master station instruction correct Check the operation status of the PLC CPU for the master station When dedicated instruction is executed the abnormal completion bit turns on The abnormal completion bit turns on when the dedicated instruction RLPASET is executed Has the parameter setting method b
82. information that indicates the module operating status and data link status of the master station local station Expressed as SW for convenience Remote input for CC Link RX Information entered in bit units from the remote station to the master station Expressed as RX for convenience Remote output for CC Link Information output in bit units from the master station to the remote station Expressed as RY for convenience Generic Term Abbreviation Description Remote register Write area for CC Link Information output in 16 bit units from the master station to the remote device station Expressed as RWw for convenience Remote register Read area for CC Link Information entered in 16 bit units from the remote device station to the master station Expressed as RWr for convenience Generic term for AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1NCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A3ACPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU Generic term for ASUSCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU Generic term for Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU Generic term for QO0JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU QCPU A mode Generic term for QO2CPU A Q02HCPU A QO6HCPU A Generic product name of the product types SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA G
83. instruction Instruct to start the control d 0 program at normal completion M305 of the RLPASET instruction performs abnormal completion processing Start of the control program M310 321 NO M220 Te Refresh RX SB6E RXO00 to RX5F are read to 336 FROM HOEO K4X1000 X1000 to X105F Refresh of RY SB6E Y1000 to Y105F are written into 160 K4Y1000 RYOO to RY5F Refresh of RWr SBBE RWr0 to RWr3 are read to 362 FROM 2 01000 K4 D1000 to D1003 D150 and 0160 are dummy devices 6 19 6 19 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS Refresh of RWw Refresh of SB SW 5 400 397 417 TO HO HSEQ H600 K4SB0 SWO MELSEC Q D2000 to D2003 are wrritten into RWw0 to RWw3 SB0000 to SBOOSF are written into SB0000 to SBOOSF SW0000 to SWOOSF are written into SW0000 SWOOSF 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK This chapter explains the procedure from the module installation to the data link startup 7 1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link When performing parameter setting with GX Developer The following describes the procedure from the module installation to the CC Link data link startup Start Mount the master module local module and standby master module on the base unit Mount the remote modules on the control board and machine Heec a
84. invalid station is specified or if the corresponding station is stopped The specification of the remote device station initialize procedure registration function was turned on without setting the remote device station initialize procedure registration A data link error occurred at the corresponding station during transient transmission A transient request was issued to other Transient target station error than the intelligent device station Check the target station Processing request error during Line test request was issued while the Perform a line test while the link link stop link was stopped is being established The specified station number exceeded the highest communication station number during temporary error invalid request temporary error invalid cancel request The station number was not specified during temporary error invalid request temporary error invalid cancel request Specify a station number that is no greater than the highest communication station number Set a specified station number 51 0003 SW0004 to SW0007 Check that the remote station intelligent device station or standby master station is operational and that the cable is not disconnected A station number other than the head Specify a head station when station number was specified during temporary error invalid temporary error invalid request temporary request temporary error invalid error invalid cancel re
85. line test 2 Line test 2 checks whether data linking can be performed normally with a specific remote station local station intelligent device station or standby master station Execute line test 2 according to the following procedure 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK From the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master module At normal completion of test The L RUN LED lights up At abnormal completion of test The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOB8 line test result MELSEC Q 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 PROGRAMMING This chapter explains common items relating to programming 8 1 Precautions on Programming The following explains precautions on the creation of a program Create a program that allows the detection of data link status and interlocking with the remote I O stations remote device stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station In addition create an error handling program Program example Set the Special Relay SB Refresh Device to SBO and the Special Register SW Refresh Device to SWO of the master station with GX Developer When setting the refresh devices of the special relay SB and the special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not duplicate with device numbers on the MELSECNET H network Modul
86. manual for the PLC CPU used 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 3 Part Identification Nomenclature and Settings The following section describes the parts names of the master and local modules and the contents of the LED display and switch settings QJ61BT11 RUN LRUN MST SMST i SD ERR LEPR STATION NO 1 MODE 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 1 LED display Verify the data link status with the LED ON OFF Off When a watchdog timer error occurs On All stations have a communication error Also lights up when the following errors occur Switch type setting is incorrect There are more than one master station on the same line There is an error in the parameter contents The data link monitoring timer was activated The cable is disconnected QJ61BT11 Or the transmission path is affected by noise RUN To check the source of the error see Section 13 4 MSI Or see Section 8 4 2 for details regarding SW0058 detailed ERR LED display status Flashing There is a communication error in a station Operating as a master station during data link control S MST On Operating as a standby master station during standby L RUN On Data link is being executed On Communication error host Flashing at fixed intervals The settings of switches 2 and 3 were changed while the power is on Fl
87. master stations Read only For the local station Stores the input status from the master station For the master station Stores the output status to the remote local intelligent device standby master stations Write only Section 8 3 2 1 For the local station Stores the output status to Remote output RY the master station Also stores the receive Read write data from the remote other MNA enabled local intelligent device standby master stations For the master station Stores the send data to the remote device all local intelligent device standby master stations Write only For the local station Stores the send data to the Remote register RWw master other Master station local intelligent For sending device standby master Local station stations For sending receiving Also stores the receive data from the remote device other local intelligent device standby master stations Section 8 3 2 2 Read write enabled O Available Not available Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors 8 5 8 5 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 2 Buffer memory list 2 2 Address Availability dn Read write Reference Item Description 44 Master Local Hexadecimal Decimal possibility Section station station For the master station Stores the receive data Remote register RWr from the remote 736 Master station device local intelligent x Sect
88. ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn LS 2 SL ms 220X1 43X2 410 36 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM Xn LS X2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn LS X2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms Master station RWr local station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the local station CPU device until the data is stored
89. number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Target areas for clear hold uu eee Areas retained regardless of the setting MELSEC Q The remote input RX in the master station and the remote input RX and remote output RY in local stations either clear or retain data from faulty stations according to the setting The remote register RWr in the master station and the remote register RWw and remote register RWr in local stations retain data from faulty stations regardless of the setting When the data link faulty station is set as an error invalid station input data remote input RX from that station is retained regardless of the setting 2 Setting method Set the Operational settings value in the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 5 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty Standby master function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station meaning a backup station for the master station if a system down occurs in the master station due to a malfunction in the PLC CPU or power supply The master station can return to normal mode and to system operation as the standby master station even during data link control by the standby master station thus preparing itself for a standby master station system down master station duplex funct
90. number m le Occupying 1 stations or more Station Station number n number Station Station Station number number ma1 number m ma1 K 3 Complete match Occupying 1 station or more A Occupying 1 station or more i Station Sn number number n n i Station number number m mod Occupying 1 station or more Occupying 2 stations or more 13 1 13 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 13 3 Error Codes Table 13 1 lists the error codes that are stored in the link special registers SW When the standby master station is operating as the master station the detectability is identical to that of the master station When the standby master is operating as a local station the detectability is identical to that of the local station Table 13 1 Error code list 1 5 Error code Detectability hexadecimal Error details Cause of error occurrence details Master station Local station B112 Transient data length error Check the line o instantaneous power failure has occurred SIPPY ponar ane Porr SUPR at the transmission station B114 Check the line 99 l 115 Check the line gt vb itd A line error has occurred or an Check the line or check thie station B116 Packet error ine error has occurred Check the line O Transient data ID error Forced termination of the remote device station initialize procedure
91. numbers used the MELSECNET H network 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction This section explains the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operational Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station number 1 Master Local Station number 2 Station number 3 station fea Cle station occupies Remote I O station Remote station X YOO to 1F Error invalid station Reserved station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station POINT 1 The remote I O net mode cannot be used The module operates in remote net mode It is not possible to set input status from a data link faulty station Inputs from a data link faulty station are cleared The standby master function is not available Do not use GX Developer for setting the network parameters if the network parameters of all the modules are set by the RLPASET instruction Change the No of boards in setting to blank if the network parameters have been already set by GX Developer Moreover in case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction the module for which the network
92. occupied stations 1 to 4 stations local station The number of stations can be switched using the GX Developer parameter setting 1 Remote RX RY 2048 points Remote register RWw 256 points master station remote device station local station intelligent Maximum number of link points per system device station standby master station Remote register RWr 256 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station Remote I O RX RY 32 points local station is 30 points Remote station local station intelligent device Remote register RWw 4 points master station remote device station local station intelligent station standby master station device station standby master station Number of link points per station Remote register RWr 4 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station Encoding method NRZI method ransmission format Error control system CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable Automatic return function RAS function Slave station cut off function Error detection by the link special relay register Number of I O occupied points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points V DC internal current consumption 0 46A Weight 0 12 kg 1 1 station or 4 stations for QJ61BT11 of the function
93. parameters Intelligent device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations Remote register RWr Numeric data such as present feed value Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Address Description RWrO RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 Single axis valid M code RWr5 Single axis error number Single axis present feed value Single axis feed speed RWr6 Single axis warning number RWr7 Single axis operating status to 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Communication between the master and intelligent device stations by transient transmission Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by specifying the opposite party at an arbitrary timing Writing data to the buffer memory in the intelligent device station using the RIWT instruction 1 Data to be written to the buffer memory in an intelligent device station is stored in the send buffer in the master module 2 The data is written to the buffer memory in the intelligent device 3 The intelligent device returns a writing complete response to the master station 4 The devices specified with the RIWT instruction are turned on Master station Intelligent device station PLC CPU Master module RIWT Send buffer 2 Device memory Buffer memory 4 Reading data from the buffer memory in the intelligent device station using the RIRD instruction 1 The data in the buffer
94. parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the No of boards in setting of GX Developer b When switching the PLC CPU from RUN to STOP output to the RY of the master station remote station local station intelligent station and standby station are held 1 PLC parameter setting hte Pase LE T rs oie F a VO assignment setting screen met pu Set the following for the slot in which the master EE module is mounted The type setting is required set other items as m 515 Detailed setting needed TT ee ea ey Type Select intelli teer Model Enter the module model name 3 Points Select 32 points Start XY Enter the start I O number for Jsettings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parame ter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut End Cancel the master module 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent functional module x Input format HEX Y Model name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Inteli QJE1BT11 0100 Cancel MELSEC Q b Intelligent function module switch setting Click the Sw
95. power off etc e Continue areas other than areas other than All points OFF Y station is set master Retains the receive signals occurs in a remote the remote I O the remote I O station setting area from the remote station station station I O station with a communication error Clears the receive Retains the Continue Continue Wh area from the remote Not affected b Not affected b ena receive area ot affecte ot affecte PN The GX Developer device station with a Y y communication error from the remote the the data link faulty communication error us Lo en power off etc PAM Continue Continue device station communication communication station is set master Retains the receive occurs in a remote with a status of the status of the station setting area from the remote Wn device station j communication remote device remote device device station with a NS error station station communication error Clears the receive When area from the local Retains the Continue Continue e The GX Developer station with a receive area Not affected by Not affected by communication error ME data link faulty communication error from the local the the power off etc a uU Continue Continue 75 station is set master Retains the receive station with a communication communication occurs in a local 235 station station setting area from the
96. procedure Unable to perform data link for the entire system Unable to receive input from a remote I O station 13 51 Check the cable connection visually or with a line 1 3 Are there any disconnected cables test e Check the line status SW0090 y Connect the supplied terminal resistors to the Are terminal tothe terminal terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link stations located at each end of the CC Link system System Connect the appropriate terminal resistors that match the cable type used for the terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link system See Section 7 5 CPU corrective action the master station CPU of the master station Does the sequence scan time exceed the tolerance for each transmission rate when using the synchronous mode 50 ms Switch to the asynchronous mode or reduce the 50 ms transmission rate 100 ms 400 ms 800 ms Are correct terminal resistors connected e Check the host parameter status SW0068 Check the switch setting status SW006A Has an error occurred at the master station Check the Loading status SW0069 Check to see if the ERR LED on the master station is flashing See Section 13 2 Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote I O station performing remote I O station data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data r
97. program Fi MAIN amp Device comment 1 2 3 4 c Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 x PLC e Operational settings Operational settings Master station 4 S Deen memory Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start E E 18 Device init Mode Online Remote net mode v E All connectcount Remote 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register R wr D1000 Remote registefiwWw 02000 Special relay SB SBO Special register SW swo Retry count 3 Automatic reconnction station count 1 Wait master station No PLC down select Stop X Scan mode setting Asynchronous i i Delay infomation settings 0 Station information settings Station information Remote device station initial interrupt settings ntemupt setin gener peus Indispensable settings setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded setting Alreadyset Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear 1 End setup Cancel Ready Q06H Host station NUM 10 6 10 6 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 Initial Setting of the Remote Device Station This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station 10 3 1 Setting the target station number Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed 1 Setting the target station number Set the target to 1 Remote device station initial se
98. range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Local station 9 Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Online Remote net mode Setting range Online Remote net mode Offline Example Set to Online Remote net mode 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings je MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Z Project Edi Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help 18 x s ale sale Start 1 0 Operational settings 1000 1000 Indispensable settings No setting Alteadyset Setifitisneeded No seting Already set Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear f KT End setup Cancel 4 D Host station 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Setthe remote output RY refresh device using
99. registration function Error at a station on which the remote device station initialize procedure registration function was executed Parameter not set error of the remote device station initialize procedure registration function Corresponding station error during sending B205 B301 Specified station number setting error Specified station number not set error Line test error station detected B303 Specified station number setting error All stations data link error B308 Station number overlap error 13 10 Station number setting error installation status In the remote device station initialize procedure registration function the Do not turn the specification of the specification of the remote device station remote device station initialize initialize procedure registration was procedure registration off until all turned off before all procedures were procedures are completed completed The specification of the remote device station initialize procedure registration function was turned on at a station other than the master station Turn on the specification of the remote device station initialize procedure registration at the master station Turn on the specification of the remote device station initialize procedure registration function after setting the remote device station initialize procedure registration Check the communication status of other stations whether or not a temporary error
100. relays relating to the standby master function 2 2 Number 580050 5 5 013 580062 5 6 62 80070 5 7 60 580071 5 7 b1 580079 7 69 SB007B 5 7 b11 Forced master switching request complete Host standby master station setting information Master station information Standby master station information Master station return specification information Host master standby master operation status b Applicability O Applicable x Not applicable Description P Master z Offline station Local station Indicates whether a forced master switching request acknowledgement is complete or not 0 Not complete 1 Switching complete Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for the host 0 No setting 1 Setting exists Shows the data link status 0 Data link control by the master station 1 Data link control by the standby master station Indicates whether or not there is a standby master station 0 No standby master station 1 Standby master station exists Indicates whether the Type setting in the network parameters is set to Master station or Master station Duplex function OFF Master station ON Master station Duplex function Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master station OFF Operates as a master station controlling data link ON Operates as a standby master station standb
101. request flag i and initial data processing i RY2F to RY20 _______________ jog complete flag i 4 RYSF to RY30 E ae pa RvaF to RY40 RvoF to RYOO RYSF to RY50 9 RYIF to 10 _RY6F to RY6O a INN 1 RY7F to RY70 Pali ea ea d RY8F to RY8O Eo to to RY7FO ZEE Signal direction Master module gt AJ65BT 64AD RYOO Selection of offset gain values Selection of voltage current Not used Initial data setting complete flag Initial data processing request flag Error reset request flag Not used 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of each remote device station Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote register RWw 1 1 1 Numeric data for averaging processing setting A D conversion enable disable setting etc RWwO E 1 RWw1 aud Rwa
102. settings is shown below je MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help 18 osa S 35 1919 sls ele sale pm E E j up TERTI Ra No of boards in fi Boards Blank no setting boards Set by the sequence program 25 MAIN f Device comment i 2 E 4 5 1 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 B PLC paramete Operational settings Operational settings N Type Master station SE X T zm memory Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start s E Device init Mode Online Remote net connectcount 1 Remote input F Remote outputfEY Remote registe F WA Remote reaister A ww Special relay SB Special reaister S W Retry count 3 Automatic reconnction station count 1 Wait master station No PLC down select Stop X lt Scan mode setting Asynchronous X Delay infomation settings Station information settings Station information Remote device station intial J 0000000000 0 Interrupt settings Indispensable settings No setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Alreadyset Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear End setup Cancel Ready 006 Host station Ovwite NUM 11 4 11 COMMUNICAT
103. station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 2 Master station RY remote I O station output This indicates the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON OFF until the remote I O station output turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3X1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote I O station response time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see
104. switch 0 x10 0 x1 Master station must be set to 00 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC 1 NC DA 2 SLD 3 DB 4 CD E DG 6 7 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 1 2 Setting the remote I O stations Settings of the remote I O station switches are shown below Transmission rate mode setting switch 0 156 kbps online Station number setting switch Module AJ65BTB1 16D 0 AJ65BTC1 16T 0 AJ65BTB1 16DT 0 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Asesste1 160 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 2 Setting the Master Station Parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 9 2 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Input data hold clear Hold Default Clear C Mater station gt Master station Mater station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Online Remote net mode Online Remote I O net mode Offline Default Online Remote net mode
105. that is synchronized with the sequence program The sequence scan and link scan start at the same time In the synchronous mode the link scan interval becomes longer when the Sequence scan takes long because the link scan is synchronized with the sequence scan IMPORTANT While in the synchronous mode the sequence scan time must not exceed the time specified for the corresponding transmission rate as listed below If the scan time exceeds the specified time a time out error occurs at each station Transmission rate Sequence scan time 10 Mbps 5 Mbps 2 5 Mbps 625 Mbps 156 Mbps 1 The asynchronous mode is recommended for a mixed system of local stations A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 when the QJ61BT11 is used as the master station When using the synchronous mode make sure to observe the restrictions in 2 and 3 below When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11 as the master station in the synchronous mode and both the A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 as local stations set the sequence scan time of the local station CPU to be shorter than ST For more details on ST see Section 5 1 When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11 as the master station in the synchronous mode and both the A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 as local stations use XnC as an interlock of the FROM TO instructions on the local station CPU side When operating in the synchronous mode the L RUN LED may be lit dimly 2 Asynchronous mode Pe
106. the 44 12 support has been added pp QJ61BT11 via AJ65BT G4 S3 or other station CPUs Options of specifying 2 or 3 stations have been Allows setting a local station to any number of occupied added to the setting stations from 1 to 4 Function version B f 1 range of the number of QJ61BT11 of function version B is required not only for local occupied stations for a stations but also for the master station local station Addition of scan DENS RE a Allows specification of scan synchronization at remote I O synchronization function Function version B Section 4 4 8 net mode at remote I O net mode Support for automatic Allows CC Link startup and remote input output as well as CC Link startup of refreshing of remote registers etc without setting the remote device stations Function version parameters a system configuration that includes not only Section 4 4 3 and intelligent device remote I O stations but also remote device stations and stations has been added intelligent device stations Function version B Allows setting the network parameters and starting the data Addition of a dedicated product that first 5 i digits ial link by using the RLPASET instruction Section 4 2 6 instruction for parameter digits of the seria E 9 It is possible to mount five or QJ61BT11 modules Appendix 2 7 setting No are 03042 or TAS change the parameters while the PLC CPU
107. the CC Link 6 1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup The following explains the procedure from setting the parameters to starting the data link 6 1 1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter memory The following explains the relationship between the CPU parameter area and the master station s parameter memory 1 CPU parameter area This area is used to set the basic values for controlling the PLC system and the network parameters that control the CC Link system 2 Master station parameter memory This area stores the network parameters for the CC Link system When the module is powered off or the PLC CPU is reset the network parameters are erased PLC CPU Master station Parameter area Parameter memory Power ON CC Link system CPU reset CC Link system network network parameter area parameter area 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 1 2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup The GX Developer is used to create the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters which are then written to the PLC CPU GX Developer Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters PLC CPU CC Link system parameter area Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters QJ61BT11 master station Parameter memory
108. the control of the PLC in operation changing data by connecting a personal computer etc to the intelligent function module or connecting peripheral devices to the CPU module configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained Before performing other controls of the PLC in operation changing program and operation status status control read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Especially when this control is performed to a remote PC from an external device troubles that have occurred on the PLC side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the PLC CPU for data communication error occurrences as well as construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program DESIGN PRECAUTION 4 DANGER e Do not write data into the system area of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Also do not output the prohibited to use signal as the output signal to an intelligent function module from the PLC CPU Writing data into the system area or outputting a signal for prohibited to use may cause system malfunction in the PLC To specify the automatic refresh parameter specify Y for the remote output RY refresh device If a value other than Y for example M or L is specified the status of the device will remain as it was prior
109. the error code see Section 13 3 Temporary error Indicates the execution result of the temporary error invalid station SWOO4B invalid station specification cancellation 64 Specification cancel 0 Normal result Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 swoo4D Indicates the execution result of the line test 64D Line test result 0 Normal H Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indi h ion result of th rameter in Swoo4F Parameter setting test dicates the execution result of the parameter setting test 64F amp result b H Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the system configuration check result when a new station is Automatic CC Link 9 SWO0052 4 added to a system using an automatic CC Link startup startup execution 6529 0 Normal result Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the details of the LED display status 0 OFF 1 ON 615614613612 611610 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO LLI ee Eeee g LINE ERROR Cable is disconnected or the transmission path is affected by noise ________y TIME ERROR Responses cannot be received from any station due to the cable being i i disconnected or the transmission SW0058 Detailed LED display path being affected by noise 6584 status PRM ERROR Invalid parameter value y M S ERROR Duplicate master station on the same line
110. the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master module When test is complete The L RUN LED lights up The MST LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOBA to B7 line test 1 result However since line test 1 is performed for 64 stations disregard the bit s for any unconnected stations When test is incomplete all stations are abnormal The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOB8 line test result MELSEC Q 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK Start Check items prior to executing line test 2 Verify that the CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP Verify that the CPU RESET switch is set to the Middle position Set the master module station number setting switch to the station number of the module for which the test is to be performed Set the transmission rate mode setting switch for the master module to 5 to 9 the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Operate the CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to RESET RESET L CLR 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR To the next page MELSEC Q 2 Checking the status of communication with a specific remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station
111. to 4096 7 Perform the settings for stations specified as local stations or intelligent device stations in the slave station setting data starting from the smallest station number x8 Keep the total size of the send and receive buffer sizes at 10004 4096 words or less Specify the size of data to be sent and received plus 7 words for the send and receive buffer sizes respectively x9 Keep the total size of the automatic refresh buffer sizes at 10004 4096 words or less Specify the necessary automatic refresh buffer size for each intelligent device station App 32 App 32 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RLPASET instruction PLC CPU Master module Command Z RLPASET Network parameter Device memory 4 Execution result 3 Data link start 1 Pass the network parameters set in S1 to S5 to the master module specified by Un 2 The master module analyzes the settings of the network parameters 3 If the network parameter settings are correct the data link is started 4 The device specified by D turns on b Itis only possible to execute one RLPASET instruction at a time App 33 App 33 APPENDIX Sequence program MELSEC Q C There are two types or interlock signals for the RLPASET instruction the completion device D and status display device at completion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END Processing of the scan where t
112. to the STOP operation when the CPU is stopped See Section 4 4 10 for how to stop the data link DESIGN PRECAUTION N CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 9inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the CPU user s manual to use Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product When installing the module securely insert the module fixing tabs into the mounting holes of the base unit while pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of the module downward Improper installation may result in malfunction breakdown or dropping out of the module Securely fix the module with screws if it is subject to vibration during use Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module Not
113. version A 2 The CC Link dedicated cable and CC Link dedicated high performance cable cannot be used together Also use the terminal resister that matches to the types of cables See Section 7 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 1 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 The relationship between the transmission speed and the maximum overall cable distance is described below 1 For a system consisting of only remote I O stations and remote device stations Remote I O station Remote I O station or remote device station or remote device station Remote I O station Master station Remote I O station or remote or remote 3 device station device station 2 2 1 1 5 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations 2 Cable length between the master station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission rate x 1 x2 distance 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 5 Mbps 59 23 23 in 60 cm 23 62 in or more 1 m 3 28 ft or more 30 cm 11 81 in to 50 m 164 1 ft 59 cm 23 23 in 10 Mbps 60 cm 23 62 in to 80 m 262 5 ft 99 cm 38 98 in 1 3 28 ft or more 100 m 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high perform
114. 0 2 2 5 About Versioni aetate De d e o c dee 2 10 2 2 6 About use of the QJ61BT11 with the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU eene 2 11 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 5 3 1 Performance 3 1 3 1 1 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 sesseeeeeeeennenennnnn 3 2 3 1 2 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 10 seen 3 4 3 2 CC Link Dedicated Cable esee testate i 3 5 4 1 Function List 4 1 4 2 Basie E nctlons uia eae Uere Ho aUe oett He due re o tains eid rto Hoe ee 4 3 4 2 1 Communication with the remote I O stations sssssssssssseeeeeeeenene ntes 4 3 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations sse 4 5 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations ceccesceeceeceeseeeececeeeeeeeaecaeeeeesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaesneateaes 4 10 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device StatiOnS ccceccesceseeeeeeeeseeeceeceeseaeeaecaeeeeeeateansaeeeaeaes 4 16 4 2 5 Parameter setting with GX Developer sess nne nnns 4 22 4 2 6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction seen 4 23 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability
115. 0 WE OK Z4 8 gt t Perera normal completion processing c M2 gt em nimm ee m etie mite cm me mmn mms yeh App 17 App 17 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 4 RISEND instruction The RISEND instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent device station and writes data to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data E user File E XE function register module Instruction Execution a symbol condition RISEND I3 ensen Un 9 62 63 Command RISEND I 4 Set data Device Description Setting range Data type pope number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the specified device Device name Within the range of the S2 Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored specified device S3 Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the stored specified device D Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the writing D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion specified device The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Start number of the device in which control data is s
116. 1 AJ61BT11 Terminal resistor required CC Link dedicated cable Maximum 26 Maximum 42 Maximum 64 A A A NEP i C N m N Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote l O station 00 000 0000 00 000 oooo a RS 232C Analog digital Remote I O module Interface module converter module AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BT R2 AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BTC 32D CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor required Total 64 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 Applicable System Applicable PLC CPUs and notes on the system configuration are described below 2 2 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted The CPU modules and network modules for remote I O station to which the QJ61BT11 can be installed and number of modules that can be installed are listed in the table below EE When performing the parameter setting with the GX Developer amp pgilcatis module Number of GPUs that canibe mound Remark module Number of CPUs that can be mounted Remark Q00JCPU QOOCPU Maximum 2 Q01CPU Q02CPU It can be Q02HCPU mounted onl module QO6HCPU Maximum 4 Q12HCPU with the E Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU 1 Maximum 4 Q25PHCPU Network QJ72LP25 25 Maximum 4 module QJ72BR15 When performing the parameter setting with the dedicated instructions Applicable module Number of CPUs that can be mounted Remak QO00JCPU QOOCPU Maximum 2 Q01C
117. 1 U S E MODEL CODE 13JL91 SH NA 080016 E 0305 MEE s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE 1 8 12 OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO KU 104 6212 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
118. 135 136H to 137 138 to 139 1 to 13B 13 to 13D 13Eu to 13F 140 to 141 142 to 143 144 145 146 147 Station number Buffer memory address 148 to 149H 14 to 14BH 14 to 14DH 14 to 14 150 151 152 153 154 to 155 156 157 158 159 15 15 15 150 15 15 8 PROGRAMMING 2 Remote registers RWw and RWr 1 Master station The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device MELSEC Q Master station RWw gt remote device station RWw local station RWr station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device Master station Address 1 0 For station 1 1 number 1 1E2u 1 1 4 For station 1 5 number 2 1 6 1 7 1 8 For station 1 9 number 3 1 1 1 For station 1EDu number 4 1 1 1 0 For station J 1 1 number 5 1F2u 1 to 2DCu For station 2DDu number 64 opp 2DFu Remote register RWw station can also be received Four words are used per station Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote register RWr
119. 1B5 1B6 to 1B7 1 8 to 1B9 1 to 1BB 1BCu to 1BD 1BEu to 1BF 1C0u to 1 1 1C2u to 1C3H 1 4 to 1 5 1C6H to 1 7 Station number Buffer memory address 1 8 to 1 9 1 1 1 to 1CDH 1 to 1 1D0x to 1D1H 1D2u to 1D3H 104 to 105 1D6u to 1D7H 108 to 1D9H 1DAu to 10 1DCu to 1DDu 10 to 1 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Master station remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored Two words are used per station 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored Two words are used per station Il The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Remote I O station Local station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Address Remote output RY Address YOF to YOO to Y10 For station J 160 RY F to RY 0 number 1 1614 RY 1F to RY 10 0 For station E1 number 1 E24 For station E3 number 2 For station J 162 number 2 163 gt E4 For station E5u number 3 For station J 164 nu
120. 2 1F1 1FO 8 PROGRAMMING 4 MELSEC Q Link special registers SW The link special registers store the data link status using word data Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH correspond to link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF For more details on the link special registers SW0000 to SW01FF see Section 8 4 2 Random access buffer The random access buffer stores any data to be sent to other stations The reading and writing of data are performed using transient transmission Communication buffer The communication buffers stores the send and receive data when performing transient transmission communication using the communication buffers between the local stations standby master station and intelligent device stations The communication buffer sizes for the local station standby master station and intelligent device station are set with network parameters For more details on the communication buffer size settings see Section 6 2 Example of communication using the communication buffers Master station Local station first module CPU CPU Buffer memory 1 gt Device memory 4 RIRD ino Receive 2 buffer for the first module 2 1 Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the CPU 2 Stores the data specified by the control data in the receive buffer for the first mo
121. 2 MOV H103 D12 Third Remote station occupies 1 station Reserved station specification data station number 3 M300 79 4 4 050 Reserved station specification station number 3 Error invalid station specification data M300 92 HR iv 2 060 Error invalid station specification station number 2 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M300 Fi j First station number 1 local station 108 v 070 Send buffer 641 First station number 1 local station MOV HB 4 071 Receive buffer 64 First station number 1 local station uos HO Ug Automatic refresh buffer Parameter registration data link startup M300 135 HGP RLP ASET 00 010 050 060 070 301 Dedicated instruction RLRASET App 36 App 36 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M301 167 RST M300 Turn the parameter setting instruction off M302 SET SB3 Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction SET M310 Instruct to start the control program at normal completion M302 of the RLPASET instruction E M os abnormal completion processing Parameter setting change Parameter hange instruction SBBE M WBA sET SB2 Instruct to stop data link 191 SB45 206 RST SB2 Turn the data link stop instruction off RST SB3 Instruct to stop refreshing SB45 210 M303 Instruct to change paramete
122. 24 V DC 240 V AC 2 A point 8 A common 8 points common module Input 1 line DC input 8 points positive common 24 V DC 7 mA 8 points common Output 1 line transistor output 8 points sink 12 24 V DC 0 5 A point 8 points common module Input 2 line DC input 8 points positive common 24 V DC 7 mA 8 points common Output 2 line transistor output 8 points sink 12 24 V DC 0 5 A point 4 A common 8 points common module Input 2 line DC input 8 points positive common negative common shared 24 V DC 7 mA 8 points common Output 2 line contact output 8 points 24 V DC 240 V AC 2 A point 8 A common 8 points common ine DC input 8 point module positive common negative common shared 24 V DC 7 mA 8 points common DC input 16 point module positive common negative common shared DC 7 mA 16 points common DC input 16 point module positive common negative common shared DC 5 mA 16 points common high speed response type DC input 32 point module positive common negative common shared DC 7 mA 32 points common DC input 32 point module positive common negative common shared DC 5 mA 32 points common high speed response type line AC input 8 point module 100 to 120 V AC 50 60 Hz 7 mA 8 points common line AC input 16 point module 100 to 120 V AC 50 60 Hz 7 mA 16 points common line DC input 32 point module positive common negative common shared 24 V DC 5 mA 32 points common 1 line DC input 32 point module posi
123. 2416 0 72 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 5 Station Status at Error Occurrence This section explains the status of each station at error occurrence 5 5 1 Status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence Table 5 1 lists the operation of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station upon the occurrence of an error Table 5 1 The status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence Master station standby master station Jon Remote I O station when the master station is operating Data link status R i mp R R i emote outpu emote emote Ri t t RX Input Output RY register RWw register RWr When data link is stopped due to an generated Continue xi Continue Hold Continue x 1 by the master station PLC CPU data link continue When data link is st d duet ted M N Hist redit b tie 2 Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue by the local station PLC CPU data link continue The GX Developer data link faulty station is set master station setting Clears the receive area from the remote I O Conti Conti ontinues ontinues S The GX Developer station having a communication error e operation of operation of data link faulty communication error By external
124. 29 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 5 18F 18E 18D 18C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 184 133 132 131 130 5F4u 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 5 5 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 5F64 16F 16 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 5F7u 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 8 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 5 9 19F 19E 19D 19C 19B 19A 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 5 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1 7 1A6 1 5 1A4 1 3 1A2 1A1 1A0 5FBu 1BF 1 1BD 1BC 1 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1BO 5FCH 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 106 105 1C4 1C3 1C2 1C1 1CO 5FDH 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 107 1D6 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 101 1DO 5 1 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1E6 1E5 1E4 1E3 1E2 1E1 1EO 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1
125. 6 RX07 RX08 to RXOF to RX00 RXIF to RX10 RX2F to RX20 3 RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX8F to RX80 to RX7FF to RX7FO RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Device No Signal name D75P2 ready complete Single axis start complete Dual axis start complete Use prohibited Single axis BUSY Dual axis BUSY Use prohibited Single axis positioning complete Dual axis positioning complete 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5 Remote output RY of the intelligent device station is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Intelligent device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations Remote output RY signals such as positioning start RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 4 RY3F to RY4F to RY40 RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY7O RY8F to RY80 to RY7FF to RY7FO Remote output RY when
126. 62 6t 52 51 50 49 683 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the watchdog timer error occurrence status 0 No watchdog timer error SW0084 f 1 Watchdog timer error occurrence 6844 SW0085 b15 614 b12 Other station 685 8899 watchdog timer error SWOO9 i 18 SWO0086 occurrence status 3 SW0085 32 686 SWO086 SW0087 SW0087 687 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 4 Link special register list 6 7 Availability Available x Not available Online Master station Local station Number Description Stores the fuse blown occurrence status of each station 0 Normal 1 Abnormal SW0088 688 SW0089 b15 689 Other station fuse SWO0088 16 x6 SWoo8A blown status 10089 32 68 SWO08A 48 SW008B SW008B 68B Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the switch change status of other stations performing data link SW008C 0 No change 68 1 Change occurred SW008D 68D Other station switch 5 008 SwooaE change status 3 68 SW008D SW008E SWo008F 68F SWO008F b15 b14 612 to b3 b2 bi
127. BT11 of function version B or later when using the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU The QJ61BT11 of function version A cannot be used b When the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU of function version A is used events for interrupt programs cannot be generated c The default parameters are set differently at automatic CC Link startup See Section 4 4 3 for details 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS This section describes the specifications of the QJ61BT11 For the general specifications of the QJ61BT11 refer to the user s manual for the CPU module to be used 3 1 Performance Specifications Table 3 1 lists the performance specifications of the CC Link Table 3 1 Performance specifications 3 Specification Can select from 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps Maximum overall cable distance Maximum transmission distance Varies according to the transmission rate See Section 3 1 1 However the following conditions must be satisfied 1 2 x b 3x 4 lt 64 a Number of modules occupying 1 station b Number of modules occupying 2 stations Maximum number of connected stations c Number of modules occupying 3 stations master station d Number of modules occupying 4 stations 16 x A 54 88 x lt 2304 A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations or intelligent device stations lt 26 Number of
128. C 7 mA 16 points common 2 line AC input 8 point module 100 to 120 V AC 50 60 Hz 7 mA 8 points common 2 line AC input 16 point module 100 to 120 V AC 50 60 Hz 7 mA 16 points common 3 line DC input 8 point module positive common 24 V DC 5 mA 8 pints common one touch connector type DC input 16 point module positive common DC 5 mA 16 pints common one touch connector type 2 3 4 line DC input 16 point module positive common 24 V DC 7 mA 16 points common low profile waterproof type line DC input 16 point module negative common DC 7 mA 16 points common low profile waterproof type ine transistor output 8 point module sink 1 station 12 24 V DC 0 5 A point 2 4 A common 8 points common 1 line transistor output 8 point module source 12 24 V DC 0 1 A point 8 points common 8 line relay output 8 point module 24 V DC 240 V AC 2A point 4A Common 8 points common 8 line triac output 8 point module 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 6 A point 2 4A common 8 point common line transistor output 16 point module sink 12 24 V DC 0 5 A point 3 6 A common 16 points common 1 line transistor output 16 point module sink 12 24 V DC 0 5A point 3 6 A common 16 points common Power leakage at OFF Low power type 1 line transistor output 16 point module source 12 24 V CD 0 1 A point 16 points common 1 line relay output 16 point module 24 V DC 240 V AC 2 A point 4 A common 16 points common 1 line triac out
129. C down select f i Scan mode setting 1 1 1 1 ___Delay infomation settings ___ Station information settings 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 _ Remote device station initil 1 5 1 Intemuptsetings Interrupt settings 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Precautions on using the standby master function a Only one standby master station exists in a single data link system b The total number of stations is 64 including the standby master station The number of stations that can be occupied by the standby master station is one or four c lf an error is detected at the master station in the initial status before parameter communication starts switching to the standby master station will not be executed d When the master station becomes faulty the data link control will automatically be transferred to the standby master station but the refresh instruction of the cyclic data will not be issued Specify the cyclic data refresh using the sequence program Once specified the information prior to the error detection at the master station will be output to each station e When the data link is being controlled by the standby master station the master station s parameters cannot be updated f An error error code B39A occurs at the standby master station if there is difference between the station number setting of the station number setting switches of the standby master station and the stat
130. CC Link System Master Local Module MITSUBISHI ON ere series Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEG Q Jaquet e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION 7 M l Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions d DANGER resulting in death or severe injury 1 1 A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage J Note that the NCAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTION 4 DANGER See Chapter 5 of this manual for each station s operating status when there is a communication error in the data link e When performing
131. E STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 2 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below a Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 b Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 c Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to D1000 d Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to D2000 e Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO f Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting the refresh devices for special relay SB and special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not overlap with device numbers used in the MELSECNET 10H network 2 Setting example A setting example is shown below 12 GX Developer C MELSEC GPPW qj61bt11 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Z Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help m 18 x oele S 915 sll ele Freon I J Sala a a 288 d 961 bt11 lt 3 Program No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 0 boards Set by the sequence program Device comment Parameter x PLC parameter Start 1 0 No a Network parar Operational setting Operationalsettings o Z o o e 24 Remote pass Type CEE AA
132. FETY PRECAUTIONS brs in tere inert ntt Per utere eet ure n He teet ere tg ei eee den A 1 BEVISIONS d utili in utin ilb td cse its eiie A 5 INTRODUCTION ch tin aban te mac eet ed qd edem ate ia ee A 6 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction esee A 11 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations ccccecceccesececeeeeeseeeeceeceeesaeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeeaesansaeeeeeeaeeaes A 12 Product Components 2 14 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to 1 11 Inwot v 1 1 1 2 Featur6Ss teta utter detienen s 1 2 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B 1 11 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1102 11 2 1 System Gonfiglratloh bee ch beh ace Eu tn on e o eee ences 2 1 2 2 Applicable ee aia th a eO ae E Oi etes 2 2 2 2 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be 2 2 2 2 2 Notes on the system configuration nnne 2 4 2 2 3 Equipment list ette tits dut a atn iie uides 2 6 2 2 4 How to check the function version and serial 2 1
133. GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction the module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the No of boards in setting of GX Developer Automatic refresh is not performed The devices should be refreshed via the FROM TO instruction or the G device It is not possible to set input status from a data link faulty station Inputs from a data link faulty station are cleared The standby master function is not available In order to change the parameter setting method turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU The following table shows how the PLC CPU operates when changing the parameter setting method without turning the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or resetting the PLC CPU Parameter setting method Parameter setting method VN mE Error notification method Continuity of data link before change after change Parameter setting with GX Parameter setting with the The RLPASET instruction Data link continues Developer RLPASET instruction completes with an error Parameter setting with the Parameter setting with GX LINK PARA ERR occurs in Data link stops RLPASET instruction Developer the PLC CPU Note that data link continues to be performed if the designation of operation at CPU down S1 5 of the RLPASET instruction is set to Continue 4 FUNCTI
134. Handling precautions 1 riri tren ires brennt etie rear Ere RP edP RP LR Le Rr nar P rne e euius 7 8 7 2 2 Installation environment sess nennen ennt rennen 7 8 7 3 Part Identification Nomenclature and SettinS cccceccecceseseeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesaeceeseaesaesaeseeeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaees 7 4 7 4 Checking the Module Status Hardware Test ccccecceseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaesaesaeeeeesaesaeseeseeesaesaeseeeeeeeates 7 7 7 5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated 7 9 1 51 iiim e eee LOO bd biis bei beate 7 10 7 6 T Branch Connection with the CC Link Dedicated Cable sse 7 11 7 6 1 T Branch system config rase eirian nennen nennen nennen 7 11 7 6 2 T Branch communication specifications list sese 7 12 7 7 Switch Settins 0 eee ceecccceecsecsceeeeeaceseesaesaeeaecaensansaeeaecaassaseaeeaecsansaseaeeaensasaeeaesaassaseaseaeeaeeeaseaseaeneaneaeeaes 7 13 727A Stavlon NUMbDeR SCIING is aera cta Vp 7 13 7 7 2 Transmission rate and mode settings spissere 7 14 7 8 Checking the Connection Status Line Test c ccscceceeceeseeeeeeeeseesecaeeeeesaesaeseeseeesaesaeeaeseaeeaesaeseeeeaseaees 7 15 9 1 Precautions on Programmirig sss eer ette Hte ent e D e D c n D ene Un Ee e va
135. I 6DT 7 16DT ogogo O 0000 ooog OO module Input module Outputmodule module Terminal resistor 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation check using a system configuration example For more detailed information on remote device stations see the Remote Device Station User s Manual 10 1 Configuring a System As shown below a system with one connected remote I O station is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QJ61BT11 Occupies 2 stations Remote device station station number 1 Terminal resistor AJ65BT 64AD SOOO Co A D conversion module IX Terminal resistor 10 1 10 1 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 1 Setting the master station Settings of the master station switches are shown below 11 QJ61BT11 RUN L RUN MST S MST SD RD ERR 5 OL ERR STATION NO x 10 Station number setting switch 0 x10 Master station must be set to 00 0 x1 x1 Transmission rate mode setting switch 0 156 kbps online
136. ION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below a Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 b Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 c Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to D1000 d Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to D2000 e Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO f Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting the refresh devices for special relay SB and special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not overlap with device numbers used in the MELSECNET H network 2 Setting example A setting example is shown below i MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Z Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help lal Dag S 11 ARL 41 ee Program 060301 Master statior 8 Program No of boards in 1 x Boards Blank no setting boards Set by the sequence program f MAIN H e Device comment 1 2 3 4 2 1 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 748 PLC paramete Operational settinas Operational settings i EI pe Master statio
137. LSEC GPPW qi61bt11 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Z Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help 81 x ep 3 a1 3E eure 1 11 Program No of boards in module fi 7 Boards Blank setting boards Set by the sequence program E Device comment or Parameter pops Slat UO a Network parar Operational setting Operational settings S Remte hass 8 Device memory Master station data link type PLC parameter auto stat r IK Device r Mode Onine Remote 0 net mode e All connect count 1 1 1 1 GS MUN Remote LL L Remote outputfR Y 1 IEEE Remote register Ei wr Ere y Remote register E ww E Special relay SB pee Special register S W loc u Retry count BE Automatic reconnection station count 8 Stand by master station No 1 PLC down select Stop Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting Station information setting gt Remote device station initial setting a Interrupt setting Interrupt settings J Indispensable settings setting 7 Alreadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Z Already set zl 4 b Ready Q25H Host station Ovwite NUF Z 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOT
138. Length of branch line 8m 26 25 ft or shorter 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 7 Switch Settings This section explains how to set the module switches 7 7 1 Station number setting The following explains how to set the station numbers for the master station local station standby master station remote station and intelligent device station For details on the station number setting switches see Section 7 3 Specify the station numbers according to the following conditions 1 Specify sequential station numbers Station numbers can be specified regardless of the order in which the stations are connected For a module occupying two or more stations specify the first station number 2 Specify unique station numbers If duplicate station numbers are specified an installation error occurs Error codes are stored SW0069 Setting example When station numbers are specified by skipping one station number 3 Standby 5 Local master station station occupies occupies 1 station 4 stations Station number 0 Master station Station number 1 1 Remote I O station occupies 1 station Station number 2 2 Remote device station occupies 2 stations Station number 9 4 Intelligent device station occupies 1 station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 5 Station number 6 Statio
139. Local station EE Program No of boards in 1 x Boards Blank no setting boards Set by the sequence program E Device comment amp ar Parameter PLC paramete mE 2 3 4 0000 Operational settings Local station Start 1 0 Operational settings I Master station data link type I Device memory I Device init Online Remote net mode x connectcount Remote inputfPX Remote outputf RY Remote register Remote register Wi Special relayiSB Special reaisted SW Retry count Automatic reconnction station count Wait master station No PLC down select Scan mode setti Delay infomation settings Station information settings Remote device station initial Interrupt settings Indispensable settings No setting Alteadyset Setifitisneeded Already set Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear m NL Cancel n Ready 006 Host station Owwe NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Setthe No of boards in for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 modules Example Set 1 module b Setthe Start I O No for the local station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 c Set the Parameter name using Operational set
140. Network parameters When the PLC system is powered ON or the PLC CPU is reset the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the data link is automatically started GX Developer PLC CPU parameters parameters CC Link system parameter area parameters parameters Master station Parameter memory Network parameters 6 1 3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup GX Developer GX Developer is used to create the PLC parameters I O assignment setting and a sequence program containing the RLPASET instruction which are then written to the PLC CPU PLC CPU Master station PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction Program memory PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction Parameter area Network parameter Turn the power supply to the PLC system on or GX Developer reset the PLC CPU Stop and then run the PLC CPU to execute the sequence program The network parameters are set and the data link is started by the RLPASET instruction The RLPASET instruction is completed after the data PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction PLC CPU Master station link is started Prog
141. Number of occupied stations 1 Master station controlling Number of occupied stations 1 i Remote Remote I Remote Remote I input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote O station RYOO to RYOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station is used as input data by the standby master station when local stations are operating thus it does not need to be saved in another device 4 32 4 32 4 FUNCTIONS Master station Remote Remote Master station Remote Remote MELSEC Q b When the master station is faulty and the standby master station is controlling the data link 1 Standby master station output Standby master station controlling Station number 1 0 Remote Remote i input RX output RY Remote I O station i Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station RX10 to RX1F Station number 3 RX20 to RX2F 1 C L lulb Number of occupied stations 1 RX30 to RX3F RX40 to RX4F RYAOtoRY4F 700777777 X00 to XOF YO00 to YOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station by the sequence program is sent to other stations as output data 2 Standby master station input Standby master station controlling Station number 1 gt 0
142. ON Local station station numbers 1 to 64 Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for SB0062 Hoststandby master the host 5E64 b2 station setting status OFF No setting ON Setting exists Indicates the input status setting from a data link faulty station of the host OFF Clear ON Retain 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only SB0050 5 5 b0 5 005 5 5 614 SB0061 5 b1 Input data status of host data link faulty station SB0065 5 6 b5 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 3 Link special relay list 4 5 Availability ae Available x Not available Number Name Description _ Onne Offline Master station Local station 580066 5 6 b6 SB0067 4 5E6u b7 SB006A 5 6 b10 SB006D 5 6 b13 5 006 5 6 b14 80070 7 b0 80071 7 b1 80072 7 b2 80073 7 b3 80074 7 b4 80075 7 b5 580076 5 7 66 80077 7 b7 580078 5 7 68 580079 5 7 b9 Number of host occupied stations Switch setting status Parameter setting status Host station operation status Master station information Standby master station information Scan mode setting information Operation Specification when CPU is down status Reserved station spe
143. ONS MELSEC Q 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability This section explains the functions for improving the reliability of the CC Link system 4 3 1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal stations Slave station cut off function This function disconnects remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that have become data link faulty due to power off and continues the data link among normal remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station no setting is required Local Local station station Master Down station Remote Remote station station Terminal Terminal resistor resistor Continues data link excluding faulty stations POINT In the event of cable disconnection the data link cannot be performed because there is no terminal resistor ERR LED lights up Master Local Local station station station Remote Remote station station Terminal Disconnection Terminal resistor resistor 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal Automatic return function This function allows remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that have been disconnected from the data link due to power off to auto
144. PPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Z Project Edt Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help 18 xl oleja a ese sll ele Indispensable settings No setting Alteadyset Setifitisneeded No seting Already set Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear i XC Endsetup Cancel 4 D Ready G06H Host station Ove NM 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Setthe remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Set the remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to D1000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Setthe remote register RWw refresh device using Remote
145. PU QO2CPU It can be CPU Q02HCPU mounted only module QO6HCPU Maximum 64 with the Q Q12HCPU mode Q25HCPU 1 9 e eee ney Maximum 64 Q25PHCPU 1 See User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module to use x2 When using Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU use the QJ61BT11 which function version is B or later x3 When using the QJ61BT11 as the local station perform the parameter setting with the GX Developer When the Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H Q12PH Q25PHCPU is used the maximum number of CPUs that can be mounted is 4 where the QJ61BT11 is used as the local station When the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU is used the maximum number of CPUs that can be mounted is 2 where the QJ61BT11 is used as the local station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 Mountable base unit QJ61BT11 be mounted any of the base unit s I O slots 4 However depending on combinations with other mounted modules and the number of mountings there may be cases where the power capacity is insufficient Be sure to consider the power capacity when mounting the module x4 Must be inside the point number range of 1 CPU unit and network module for remote I O station 3 Applicable software package The software package available for the QJ61BT11 is listed below Manual name Model name Remarks Required MELSEC PLC E 5 programming software GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW n in the model name is 4 or greater x5 When the funct
146. Perform the setting using the GX Developer a Setting the master station First set Type in the network parameters MELSEC Q Master station that was down returns to system operation Master station Duplex function Master station that was down does not return to system operation Master station Next set the Standby master station No of the network parameter Setting range 1 to 64 blank means no specification for standby master station Default blank no specification for standby master station E pe Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational settings Operational settings Master station Duplex function v Mode Online Remote net made v Alconetcon 1 1 3 Retycount J 3 Automatic reconnection stationcount 1 Wait master station No 1 1 1 1 Delay infomation settings Station information settings Station information Remote device station initial Initial settings Interrupt settings Interrupt settings Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start v b Setting the standby master station Set Type in the network parameters to Standby master station Set the mode to Online Remote net mode pu SSS T1 Dperational settings __ Master station data link type 0 1 Mode Online Remote net mode v Alcomeccomt J Cd RENE ES Autmalicreconnctionstaioncout 1 1 Watmasersa onNo 0 0 0 i PL
147. Product information The function version and serial No are displayed as follows 080410000000000 B Function Version B Serial No first 5 digits 13 18 13 18 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 19 MELSEC Q H w Information x r Module r Display format Module QU61BT11 Product information 020410000000000 B6 C HEY C pec H w LED Information App SW Information a Item Value Item Value Item Value Iten Value RUN 0001 156K 0000 STNo x10 0000 STNo 0001 ERR 0000 625 0000 STNo xl 0000 STNo 0000 MST 0000 2 5M 0000 MODE 0000 B RATE 00 5 0000 5H 0000 MODE 0000 LOCAL 0001 10 0000 CONFIG SW 0000 M S 0000 TEST 0000 PRM 0000 50 0000 TIME 0000 Sl 0000 LINE 0000 32 0000 Start monitor Stop monitor Close c H WLED Information The H W LED Information displays the following data link information 0 At watchdog timer error Switching between 0 and 1 There is a faulty station MST MST 1 Set to the master station S MST 1 Set to the standby master station 1 Set to a local station 25K trAtransmissinspeedofG25kbpsisselected 2 5M 1 A transmission speed of 2 5 Mbps is selected S 0 51 s2 Noted S Not used d H W SW Information The H W SW Information displays the following information Station number of relevant module when the power supply is turned on Station numb
148. RINT remote registers stops registration instruction OFF No instruction ON Instructed SBOO5E Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure 5 b14 device station initialization OFF Not executed i procedure ON Being executed Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization Complete status of remote device station initialization procec Ur 5E0n b15 procedur OFF Not complete ON Complete device station Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration SWO005F initialization procedure instruction with SBOOOB ey instruction result binis Other than 0 Store the error code see Section 13 3 Cannot be used for the standby master station that is controlling the data link For details on how to create a program see Section 10 4 1 When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB0000 is turned off after the initial processing completion all of the RY signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off Therefore about signals that are required to turn always on such as conversion valid signal they should be turned on in the sequence program 2 If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the remote device station initialization procedure registration the completion status of remote device station initializat
149. RX57F RY560 to RY57F gt RWwAC to RWwAF RWrAC to RWrAF App 44 App 44 APPENDIX MELSEC Q RWwCO to BWwC3 gt RY620 to RYGSF 58 RX720 to RX73F RY720 to RY73F RWwE4 to RWwE7 RWrE4 to RWrE7 6o RX760 to RX77F gt RY760 to RY77F gt RWwEC to RWwEF gt RWrEC to RWrEF RX780 to RX79F RY780 to RY79F RWwFO to RWwF3 RWrFO to RWrF3 RX7A0 to RX7BF RY7A0 to RY7BF RWwF4 to RWwF7 gt RWrF4 to RWrF7 7 to RX7DF RY7CO to RY7DF gt RWwF8 to RWwFB RWrF8 to RWrFB RX7E0 to RX7FF RY7EO to RY7FF RWwFC to RWwFF RWIFC to RWrFF App 45 App 45 Ind INDEX A B C About Added Changed Functions in Function Version 1 11 Analog digital converter module 2 9 Applicable CPU 2 2 Applicable system 2 2 Automatic CC Link startup 1 8 4 50 Automatic return function 1 5 4 26 Automatic update 8 16 Buffer memory list sssssss 8 5 CC Link dedicated cable 3 5 CC Link diagnostics 13 15 Communication between the master station and intelligent device stations 12 1 Communication betwe
150. S KS When the station number setting switch is set to 1 to 64 Line test 2 Terminals SLD and FG are connected inside the module Since a 2 piece type terminal block is used the module can be replaced without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block Replace the module after turning its power OFF The settings of the station number setting switch and the transmission rate mode setting switch become valid when the module power is turned from OFF to ON or the PLC CPU is reset Thus if the settings were changed while the module power was ON turn the module power from OFF to ON or reset the PLC CPU again 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 4 Checking the Module Status Hardware Test The hardware test checks whether or not each module works properly by itself Always perform this hardware test before configuring the system and for each module by itself without connecting the cable Otherwise the hardware test will not be executed properly Execute the hardware test using the following procedure Start Connect the terminal resistor attached to the module between the DA and DB terminals of the master local module Check items prior to turning the power ON Check the module installation status Check the input power voltage Verify that the CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP Verify that the CPU RESET switch is set to t
151. SET instruction 5 M310 Instruct to start the control program at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction M305 Performs abnormal completion processing D150 and D160 are dummy devices App 37 App 37 APPENDIX Start of the control program M3 10 321 Refresh of RX Refresh of RY Refresh of RWr Refresh of RWw 379 TO 396 Refresh of SB SW 397 417 38 NO HOEO KAT 000 H160 K4Y1000 H2E0 D1000 HIE D2000 MCR M320 NO K4 K64 END MELSEC Q RXO00 to RX5F are read to X1000 to X105F Y1000 to Y105F are written into RY00 to RYSF RWr0 to RWr3 are read to D1000 to D1003 D2000 to D2003 are wrritten into RWw0 to RWw3 SB0000 to SBOOSF are written into SB0000 to SB003F SW0000 to SWOOSF are written into SW0000 to SWOOSF App 38 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 3 Differences Between the New and Previous Models The following lists the differences between the QJ61BT11 and older models ed QJ61BT11 A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 Startup using the parameters i Startup using Yn6 Yn8 and of the master station CPU Startup using Yn6 Yn8 and Startup procedure f master station CPU Yn6 and Yn8 cannot be dedicated instructions Remote device station initialization procedure registration function Module reset function usin the sequence program Access to other stations via Yes No No
152. Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote I O station response time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms 5 2 2 Master station lt remote device station 1 Master station RX remote device station RX This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time m
153. TION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11 7 MELSEC Q 2 Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below iP MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Z Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help l x Dieja s a so ss ele Program pe REM 60301 Local station 5 88 Program No of boards in 1 x Boards Blank no setting boards Set by the sequence program MAIN 8 4 Device comment 1 2 3 4 Ez Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 749 PLC paramete Operational settings Operational settings a Type Local station Device memory Master station data link type I amp Device init Mode Online Remote net mode v Y All connectcount Remote input FiX Remote output F Remote register E Wr Remote reaister Fi Ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Automatic reconnction station count Wait master station No Scan mode setting Delay infomation settings Station information settings Remote device station initial Interrupt settings Indispensable settings No setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded setting Alreadyset Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear End setup Cancel Ready QO6H Host station Ovewte
154. This function checks the status of the connected stations to see if the number of occupied stations is overlapping or if there is more than one station with the station number setting of 0 in the system see Section 4 4 11 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 21 Transient transmission With this method of transmission the counterpart is specified and 1 1 communication is performed at an arbitrary timing see Section 4 5 Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module RWT Send buffer Buffer memory Device memory Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module RRD Buffer memory Device memory Send buffer 1 10 1 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B This section explains the functions that have been added to or changed in the QJ61BT11 of function version B Please refer to the relevant reference section in order to check the following item How to check the function version and serial No see Section 2 2 4 The following table lists the functions that have been added to or changed in the QJ61BT11 of function version B Function version Reference Function Function summary serial No section Allows monitoring of and reading writing programs from to Multiple PLC system f Section Function version any CPU in a multiple PLC system mounted with
155. U device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Station number 1 Local station Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX RYOF to Rvoo 7 RxoFtoRxoo l 7 S RxoFtoRxoo RY1D to RY10 J VIBXID to RX10 J LIIRXITD to RX10 RY2F to RY20 RX2FtoRX20 _RX2F to RX20 RY3F to RY30 RX3F to RX30 RX3F to RX30 RY4F to RY40 RX4F to RX40 RX4F to RX40 5 50 7 J RX5F to RX50 RX5F to RX50 to RY60 RX6F to RX60 RX6F to RX60 1 RYZFtoRY70 RX7F to RX70 RX7F to RX70 RY8F to RY80 RX8F to RX80 RX8F to RX80 to 5 1 RYTEFtoRY7TFO IAX7FF to The last two bits cannot be used in the communication between the master and local stations 4 12 4 12 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Word data from the master station to all local stations 9 The word data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory of the master station The remote register RWw is used as word data for writing in local station systems 10 The data in the buffer memory remote register RWw is stored a
156. When RY is selected ON OFF When RWw is selected 0 to 65535 Decimal 0 to FFFF Hexadecimal Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration unit 1 Target station 3 x Input format m DEC Execute Operational Executional condition Details of execution Flag condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data osjon x Execute Same as vi 0 Execute Setnew Execute Setrew f gt gt Execute Setnew execute Setrew c gt Execute Setnew A Execute Set new BH et new et new et new et new et new et new et new et new Default 4141414 4 eo o 414144 T m 4 4 i wo 4 End setup Cancel d 1 Because one step is performed per link scan as the number of settings increases the processing time will extend beyond that specified in the sequence program 2 While SBOD remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction is on the refresh of the remote input output and remote registers stops 2 Validate initial settings Before creating a program for communication with remote device stations create a program to validate the initial settings that use SBOD remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction and SB5F completion status of remote device station initializ
157. Ww8 to RWwB gt RWr8 RWrB RX60 to RX7F RY60 to RY7F RWwC to RWwF RW C to RWrF RX80 to RX9F RY80 to RY9F 6 RXA0toRXBF gt RYAO to RYBF RXCO to RXDF RYCO to RYDF RWw10 to RWw13 RWr10 to RWr13 RWw14 to RWw17 RWr14 to RWr17 RWw18 to RWw1B RWr18 to RWr1B RXE0toRXFF gt RYEO to RYFF RWw1C to RWwiF gt RWrC to RWrF RX100toRX11F gt RY100 to RY11F gt 10 IRX120toRX13F gt RY120 to RY13F gt 11 RY140 to RY15F RY160 to RY17F 13 RY180 to RY19F 14 RX1A0 to gt Rv1A0 to RYtBE RY1CO to RY1DF 16 RY1E0 to RY1FF 17 RY200 to RY21F 18 RY220 RY23F 19 RY240 to RY25F gt 20 RX260t0 RX27F gt RY260 to RY27F 21 RX280 to RX29F gt RY280 to RY29F RX2A0 to RX2BF gt RY2A0 to RY2BF gt a s RY2CO to RY2DF gt 24 RXeEOtoRX2FF gt RY2EOto RY2FF gt RY300 to RYS1F gt RYS20 to RY33F gt RY340 to RY35F RY360 to RYS7F RYS80 to RY39F RYSAO to RY3BF RYSCO to RYSDF gt RYSEO to RY3FF gt RY400 to RYA1F RY420 to RY43F RY440 to RY45F gt RY460 to RY47F RY480 to RY49F RY4A0 to RY4BF RY4CO to RYADF gt RY4E0 to RY4FF gt RY500 to RYS1F RY520 to RY53F RY540 to RYSSF to RWw2F RWreC to RWr2F RWw50 to RWw53 RWr50 to RWr53 RWw54 to RWw57 RWr54 to RWr57 RX560 to
158. X Developer SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n in the model name is 4 or greater series modules other than the CPU module power supply module and I O module that are mounted on the base unit A series and QnA series modules that are mounted on the base unit excluding the CPU module power supply module and I O module QnACPU QCPU Q mdoe Intelligent function module Special function module Product Components The components of the QJ61BT11 are listed below Item name Quantity QJ61BT11 main unit Terminal resistor 110 O 1 2 W brown brown brown used when wiring with the CC Link dedicated cable or Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor 180 1 2 W brown orange brown used when wiring with the CC Link dedicated high performance cable 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the specifications parts names and settings of the QJ61BT1 1 Control amp Communication Link System Master Local Module hereinafter referred to as the QJ61BT11 which is used with the MELSEC Q series PLC CPUs 1 1 Overview CC Link is the abbreviation of the Control amp Communication Link in this manual Throughout this manual it will be referred to as CC Link The CC Link system connects distributed modules such as an I O module an intelligent function module and a special function module using dedicated cables so that these modul
159. _ Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station i Responses from remote H i H I O stations A C e au NE 1 Input 1 Input2 i i ai i MES 1 1 I gt 1 11 gt gt IV 1 1 1 4 Transmission delay time I Delay time due to response delay of remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Sequence scan Link scan PLC CPU Sequence scan Jai e A Master station buffer memory Remote input RX Link scan Le HHH HH HEH HHH Response time of the first station __ d T i i 1 i 1 J 1 i i 1 j i Response time of the corresponding station i Response time of the final station i i i i Responses from remote H H 1 i stations 4 i 1 at C i i 1 1 Input 1 Input 2 i 0 0 OO 1 E f i 1 1 I gt lt Il gt lt IV 9 i f 1 4 Transmission delay time I Delay time due to response delay of remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from rece
160. a set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range App 6 App 6 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 Program example When XO is turned ON this program stores 10 word data to DO and succeeding addresses from buffer memory address 100 of the intelligent device station number 1 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X Y40 to X Y5F When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO D101 D102 D103 D104 oap RE a ce Ces ceris eei pats toh ee SP Rh Ay sen fn Ee R sen gei laa A ler E en ee tens wishes CPU SUE eee yee cheats MT shee ee eee ee ee Ve eg SPE ete Rtg EE penne ene PN App 7 App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 RIWT instruction The RIWT instruction writes the data for the specified points to the buffer memory or the PLC CPU device of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data Ed T user File EXE function register module Leen Instruction Execution n symbol condition RIWT un 62 RIWT f GP RIWT o HH Set data Un Start number of the module 0 to FEH Binary
161. able This section explains how to perform a T branch connection using the CC Link dedicated cable 7 6 1 T Branch system configuration The following shows a system configuration using T branch connection ms block connector Remote I O station remote device station Main line Local station intelligent device station Remote I O station remote device station Master station Branch line Branch line Branch line Branch line Terminal resistor between DA and DB Terminal resistor between DA and DB Remote I O station remote device station Remote I O station remote device station Remote I O station remote device station Local station intelligent device station Remote I O station remote device station Remote l O station Local station Remote l O station Y 4 remote device station intelligent remote device station A maximum of 6 stations device station can be connected I A maximum of 6 stations can be connected The number of branch lines is determined by the branch line length per branch line and the overall branch line length 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 6 2 T Branch communication specifications list The following describes the communication specifications for T branch connection For communication s
162. ading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWOO9B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F A local station does not operate at the specified Is QJ61BT11 of function version A set to occupy 2 Set it to occupy 1 or 4 stations number of occupied stations or 3 stations Check the sequence program Is the data link stop SB0002 turned on MUNDO Unable to stop data link Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Has an error occurred Check the data link stop result SW0045 Check the sequence program Isine data link restar 5 0000 4 Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Check the data link restart result SW0041 Check the cable connection visually or with a line test Is the corresponding station disconnected e Check the parameters for local station Check the operation status of the PLC CPU in the corresponding station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved Unable to communicate from a local station remote Are there any overlap station numbers register RWw to the master station remote register RWr Unable to restart data link Do the parameters for the number of modules and The remote station local station intelligent device station information match the s
163. ance cable uses terminal resistor 130 Q Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable PENA distance 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 900 m 2952 9 ft ___ 25Mbps 400 m 13124 ft 2 5 MES 30 cm 11 81 in or more oO nite t 5 Mbps 160 m 524 96 ft Number of connected stations 1 to 32 domo d 11 81 in Number of connected enia M s 1 m 3 28 ft or more 80 m 262 5 ft 39 cm 15 35 in stations 33 to 48 40 cm 15 75 in or more 100 m 328 1 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 20 m 65 52 ft Number of connected 40 cm 15 75 in to stations 49 to 64 69 cm 27 17 in 30 m 98 43 ft 70 cm 27 56 in or more 100 m 328 1 ft The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Example When the transmission rate is 10 Mbps and 43 remote I O stations and remote device stations are connected using the CC Link dedicated high performance cable because the cable connecting the second and third stations is 35 cm 13 78 in the maximum overall cable distance will be 80 cm 31 5 in First Second Third 4th 43th M i i Remote I O station Remote device Remote I O station Remote I O station dica station station 1m 3 28 ft 50 cm 19 69 in 35 cm 13 78 in
164. and local station However caution is required since errors are no longer detected see Section 4 4 7 Stations to be specified as error invalid stations Station number 4 Station number 7 Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupying Station number 5 occupying Remote station Remote station 1 station Remote station 4 stations occupying 2 stations occupying 1 station occupying 2 stations bo _ This station does not become a data link faulty station Station number 4 Station number 7 Local station Local station Master station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupying Station number 5 occupying Remote station Remote station 1 station Remote station 4 stations occupying 2 stations occupying 1 station occupying 2 stations 17 Scan synchronous function This function synchronizes the link scan to the sequence scan see Section 4 4 8 18 Temporary error invalid station setting function With this function the module specified by the GX Developer will not be treated as a data link faulty station by the master or local station while in online The module can be replaced without detecting an error in online see Section 4 4 9 19 Data link stop restart The data link can be stopped and restarted while it is being used see Section 4 4 10 20 Station number overlap checking function
165. ange to be set with a parameter 3 When the counterpart PLC CPU is other than QCPU mode QCPU A mode QnACPU AnUCPU and reads the PLC CPU device the setting range will be 1 to 32 words 1 Buffer memory in the CC Link Buffers in master station and local station Remoteregster m E Link specialrelay Link special register 2 Device memory in the PLC CPU Device contents Name Unit Access code Attribute code Bit Word ipureay x O Hexadecimal om Intemalrelay M O Deima _ 09 O _ 89 _ inkreley O Hexadecimal 29 T I Desire gi _ Timer E Decimal Q7 970 7 DR DRE R87 E RUN Retenivetimer onac st O Dema Retentivetimer coil s o Dema _ 8w Retentive timer present value st Dedma 8 05 csar fg 6 5 rh Data edis D Decimal Fiemgser So R O Dema sm Special link rey O Hexadecimal ess Special link register sw Hexadecimal btn Special relay Special register so O 4 Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed When accessing a bit device specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16 App 4 App 4 APPENDIX
166. arameter setting with Not required GX Developer Parameter setting with Required dedicated instruction Program requirement for setting parameters Number of Automatic CPUS that can refresh be mounted Changing the parameter settings while the PLC CPU is 6 System down prevention Slave station cut off function Because the system employs the bus connection method even if a module System fails due to power off it will not affect the communication with other normal modules Also for a module using a 2 piece terminal block the module can be replaced during data link Replace the module after turning off the module power However if the cable is disconnected data link to all stations are disabled see Section 4 3 1 Station number 1 Station number 3 Remote station occupying 2 stations Remote station occupying 1 station Station number 4 Local station occupying 1 station NC Station number 5 Station number 7 Local station occupying Remote station occupying 2 stations Master station NE Faulty station Station number 1 V Data link continues Station number 3 Remote station occupying 2 stations Remote station occupying 1 station Station number 4 Local station occupying 1 station 7 Automatic return function When a station that has been disconnecte
167. as already been established only stations whose station numbers overlap may also go down if stations with overlapping head station numbers return to the system If an automatic CC Link startup was performed a temporary error invalid station cannot be used In case of a multiple PLC system where each CPU controls several QJ61BT1 1 modules the automatic CC Link startup is performed on the QJ61BT11 that has the smallest head I O number 2 Execution conditions a When the parameters are not set the automatic CC Link startup function is applicable only to one QJ61BT11 Even when more than one QJ61BT11 is mounted on the base unit the automatic CC Link startup function is applicable only to the first one It is applied to the QJ61BT11 that has the smallest start number as seen from the PLC CPU side b When performing an automatic CC Link startup without setting the parameters up to three MELSECNET 10H modules can be used on the master station CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 4 Communicating with intelligent device stations Remote net mode The remote net mode allows communication with all stations remote I O stations remote device stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master stations Furthermore it allows not only cyclic transfer but also transient transmission which transfers data at an arbitrary timing to intelligent and local stations Setting method Set the remote net mode in
168. ashing at inconsistent intervals The terminal resistor is not attached The module and CC Link dedicated cable are affected by noise ID During data sending RD During data receiving Station number setting switches Set the module station number setting at the time of shipment 0 Setting range See Master station 0 Local station 1 to 64 Standby master station 1 to 64 If a number other than 0 to 64 is set the ERR LED lights up MST and S MST LED indicator lamp status and station types Operation status Type of station set Operating as a master station Operating as a standby master controlling data link station standing by Master station MST 9 OSMST MSTO SMST Standby master station 5 9 O SMST MSTO SMST Localstation o o On Off 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q switch settings at time of shipment 0 0 Transmission rate 156 kbps iu see Section 7 7 2 Transmission rate 10 Mbps 6 Transmission rate 625 kbps Transmission rate 5 Mbps MW A Transmission rate 156 B Transmission rate 625 kbps Hardware test D Transmissionrate 5 Mbps see Section 7 4 Connect the CC Link dedicated cable for data linking For the connection method see Section 7 5 Line test see Section 7 8 When the station number setting Switch is set to 0 Line test 1 8006 MODE 2
169. ation area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in parameters a remote device station Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station 5 0071 e Check the number of connected modules 51 0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station 13 4 13 4 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWOO9B e Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Unable to write data to the remote register RWw Do the settings match SW0098 to SWOO9B the remote device station e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Are there any overlap station numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Ch
170. ation procedure For more details see Section 10 4 3 Preparation for communication with remote device stations 1 Register the network parameters and the created program in the PLC CPU 2 Reset the PLC CPU or turn the power from off to on 3 Instruct the master station to start the initial processing This instruction may not be necessary in some cases such as when the remote input RX is set as a startup condition 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 2 Performing high speed processing Event issuance for the interrupt program This function issues events signals to execute an interrupt program according to factors such as the on off status of specified RX RY and SB devices and the match mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data in order to allow the PLC CPU to execute the interrupt program Because the conditions for issuing the events are set using the GX Developer the number of program steps is reduced thus shortening the scan time Events can be issued for all stations A maximum of 16 event issuance conditions can be set 1 Event issuance conditions Events are issued under the following conditions On off status of specified RX RY and SB devices Match mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data When the link scan is completed 2 Event issuance condition setting method a First set the Interrupt settings in the network parameters 1 Input format Set the data input format for Word device Se
171. ations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station Line test 1 checks the status of communication with all modules that have been connected Line test 2 checks the status of communication with specific modules Neither line test 1 nor line test 2 requires parameter settings 1 Line test 2 is performed when an error is generated by line test 1 Thus if the result of line test 1 is normal there is no need to conduct line test 2 2 Line test 2 cannot be performed on the standby master station 1 Checking the connection status and the status of communication with remote stations local stations intelligent device stations standby master station line test 1 Perform the line test according to the following procedure Check items prior to executing line test 1 Verify that the CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP Verify that the CPU RESET switch is set to the Middle position Set the station number setting switch for the master local module to 0 Set the transmission rate mode setting switch for the master local module to 5 to 9 the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Operate the CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to RESET RESET L CLR 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK From
172. atus OFF Not executed x x ON In progress TET Indicates the acknowledgment status of the standby master station Master switching GR SB005A recuset when it has received a master switching request from the line bE5u b10 OFF Not acknowledged ON Request acknowledged Indicates whether or not the switching from the standby master SB005B Master switching station to master station is complete 5 b11 request complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request has been Forced master SB005C switching request acknowledged bE5u b12 acknowledgment OFF Not acknowledged ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request is Forced master Switching request 5 b13 complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Execution status of Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure remote device station OFF Not executed initialization procedure ON Being executed Indicates the completion status of the initialization procedure Completion status of cm remote device station GERI initialization procedure AFFE NOt complete ON Complete Indicates the mode setting status of the transmission rate mode SB0060 Host inode setting switch for the host 6 b0 OFF Online ON Other than online Indicates the station type of the host Host type OFF Master station station number 0 O O x
173. ber Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X1 1 5 21 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 2 1 5 41 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw remote device station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the CPU device until the data for the remote device station is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1
174. ber 0 Master station o 64 Local station Stores the operation setting status of the module b15 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 0 0 0 Station type 0 Master station local station 1 Standby master station SW0062 Module operating 662k status Input status from the data link faulty station 0 Clear 1 Hold Number of occupied stations 0 1 station 1 4 stations Indi ewm 7 Swoo064 No of retries Hen the retry count setting information when there is an error 6644 information P 1 to 7 times Indi h ing information for the number of i SWOO065 No of automatic t gi ormation for the number of automatic return stations during one link scan 665 return stations 1 to 10 stations SWO0066 Delay timer Indicates the setting information for the scan interval delay time 6664 information 0 to 100 50 u s Stores the parameter information area to be used SWO0067 CPU built in parameters 667 Parameter information Dedicated instruction parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction and data link startup Du Default parameters automatically starts CC Link SWO068 Stores the parameter setting status 668 Host parameter status 0 Normal H Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the duplicate station number status and parameter matching of each station SW0069 4 0 Normal Loading status 6694 ng Other than 0 S
175. cally for each link scan in the remote register RWr of the master station and the remote register RWw of other local stations 14 The word data stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters 15 The word data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station Station number 1 Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Communication between the master and local stations by transient transmission Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by specifying the opposite party at an arbitrary timing Writing data to the buffer memory in a local station using the RIWT instruction 1 Data to be written to the buffer memory in a local station is stored in the send buffer in the master module 2 The data is written to the buffer memory in the local station 3 The local station returns a writing complete response to the master station 4 The devices specified with the RIWT instruction are turned on Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module Send buffer gt Device memory Buffer memory 4 Reading data from the buffer memory in a local station using the RIRD instruction
176. cation between the PLC CPUS can be performed in N N mode using bit data remote input RX and remote output RY and word data remote registers RWw and RWr PLC CPU Master station Automatic refresh X EM Automatic refresh Y Remote output RY Remote register RWw Automatic refresh Remote register RWr Automatic refresh Link scan Local station Link scan Link scan Link scan MELSEC Q PLC CPU Remote input RX Remote register RWr Remote b Transient transmission Read RIRD or write RIWT operation of the local station buffer memory and CPU device can be performed at any timing Transient transmission Transient transmission register Automatic refresh Y Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh RWw Local station Transient transmission PLC CPU Master station RIWT Transient transmission area Transient transmission Transient transmission area Buffer memory PLC CPU 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU EIS 4 Intelligent device station communication Communication between the master station and the intelligent device station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission see Section 4 2 4 a Cyclic transmission Signals for handshaking with the intelligent dev
177. cified status Error invalid station specified status Temporary error invalid station setting information Parameter receive status Host station switch change detection Master station return Specification information Indicates the setting status of host occupied stations Number of 3 580066 580067 occupied station stations on on or Indicates the switch setting status OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored in SW006A Indicates the parameter setting status OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored in SW0068 Indicates the host data link operation status OFF Being executed ON Not executed Indicates the data link status OFF Data link control by the master station ON Data link control by the standby master station Indicates whether or not a standby master station is present OFF Not present ON Present Indicates the scan mode setting information OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode Indicates the operation specification status using a parameter when the CPU is down OFF Stop ON Continue Indicates the reserved station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0074 to SW0077 Indicates the error invalid station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0078 to SW007B Indica
178. cked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Data link disorder station setting T Hold input data Cancel e Set the station type using Type Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station f Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Online Remote net mode Setting range Online Remote net mode Online Remote I O net mode Offline Example Set to Online Remote net mode 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q g Setthe total number of connected stations in the CC Link system including reserved stations using All connect count Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Example Set to 5 modules Set the number of retries using Retry count when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Example Set to 5 times Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single link scan using Automatic reconnection station count Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Example Set to 2 modules Set the station number for the standby master station using Standby master station No Default value Blank N
179. ction explains how to connect the master module local modules standby master module remote modules and intelligent device modules with the CC Link dedicated cables 1 CC Link cables can be connected from any station number 2 Connect the supplied terminal resistors to each module at both ends of the CC Link system Connect the terminal resistors between DA and DB 3 The terminal resistors to be connected vary depending on the types of cables used in the CC Link system Cable type CC Link dedicated cable _ 110 Q 1 2 W brown brown brown Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable 130 Q 1 2 W brown orange brown 4 The master module can be connected at points other than both ends 5 Star connection is not allowed 6 The connection method is shown below Master module Remote module Local module Terminal resistor Terminal resistor CC Link dedicated cable IMPORTANT The CC Link dedicated cable and CC Link dedicated high performance cable cannot be used together If they are used together proper data transmission cannot be guaranteed Connect the shielded wire of the CC Link dedicated cable to SLD of each module and ground both ends of the shielded wire using D type grounding via FG The SLD and FG are connected within the module 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 5 1 Wiring ch
180. ctions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 2 3 Master station lt local station 1 Master station RX local station RY This indicates the time from the moment the local station CPU device turns ON OFF until the master station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn X 2 SL ms 20 X 1 2 10 50 ms Maximum value a Asynchr
181. d from the link due to power off recovers the normal status it will join the data link automatically see Section 4 3 2 Station number 5 4 stations Station number 7 Local station occupying Remote station occupying 2 stations 4 stations 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 8 Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error The data link status can be set to either stop or continue when an error causing the operation to stop such as SP UNIT ERROR occurs in the PLC CPU at the master station With errors enabling the operation to continue such as BATTERY ERROR the data link will continue regardless of the setting see Section 4 3 3 9 Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station The data entered received from a data link faulty station can be cleared or the previous status immediately before the error can be maintained see Section 4 3 4 10 Standby master function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station backup station for the master station if a malfunction occurs in the master station due to a malfunction of the PLC CPU or power supply The master station can return to online even during data link control by the standby master station and prepares itself for standby master station system down see Section 4 3 5 Standby master station Data link control by the master station Station number 1 Ma
182. d with bit data link special relays SB and word data link special registers SW The SB and SW represent the information in the buffer memory of the master local module which is used by reading to the device specified in an automatic refresh parameter e Link special relays SB Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH Link special registers SW Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH 8 4 1 Link special relays SB Link special relays SB0000 to SBOOSF are turned ON OFF by the sequence program and SB0040 to SBO1FF are automatically turned ON OFF The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory address When the standby master station is controlling the data link the availability of the link s special relays is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station the availability of the link s special relays is identical to that of a local station For the correspondence with the buffer memory see Section 8 3 2 3 Table 8 3 Link special relay list 1 5 Availability Available x Not available Number Name Description Online Master station Local station PEN RE Restarts the data link that had been stopped by SB0002 580000 0 b0 Data link restart OFF Restart not instructed i ON Restart instructed Instructs to perform cyclic data refresh after the data link control is Refresh instruction at 580001 standb
183. doing so may cause damage to the module Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e When turning on the power and operating the module after installing is completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of malfunction if the terminal cover is not attached Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may cause short circuits or malfunction If the terminal screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module These may cause fires failure or malfunction The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent foreign objects such as cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation e Use a dedicated cable as specified by the manufacturer for the CC Link system If a cable other than the one specified by the manufacturer is used the performance of the CC Link system cannot be guaranteed Also follow the specifications listed in Chapter 3 for the overall cable d
184. dule Master station Local station first module CPU CPU 2 Buffer memor gt 1 Send buffer Da L gt for the first memory module 2 gt 1 Stores the data to be written in the buffer memory of the local station or to the device memory of the CPU in the send buffer for the first module 2 Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the CPU 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 7 Automatic update buffer The automatic update buffer stores automatic update data when performing transient transmission communication using the automatic update buffer with the AJ65BT R2 The automatic update buffer size of the AJ65BT R2 is specified by a network parameter For more details on the automatic update buffer size settings see Section 6 2 Communication example using the automatic update buffer Master station AJ65BT R2 first module Buffer memory Automatic Automatic Automatic update update 2 update buffer 5 k buffer for memory the first module 1 Accesses the automatic update buffer for the first module 2 Stores the data specified by the control data in the CPU device For details on the automatic update timing see AJ65BT R2 Type RS 232C Interface Module User s Manual 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 4 Link Special Relays and Registers SB SW The data link status can be checke
185. dule internal 5 V DC Input Xn When the input external power supply turns OFF the input Xn turns OFF after the response time for the input module to change from ON to OFF 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q b Countermeasure for mis input For the power supply module the stabilized power supply and the input external supply power of AC input wire the power cables from the same power source PLC CPU Remote I O module Module power supply supply power Stabilized 24 V DC MT power supply Power supply module Master module For DC input PLC CPU Master module Remote I O module 2 ne gt Q o o is 5 a For AC input M J Module power supply Input external supply power Stabilized power supply When supplying power from a single power source to multiple remote I O modules select the proper type of cable and perform the wiring in consideration of the voltage decline Connections can be established if the receiving port voltage at the remote I O module is within the specified range of the remote I O module to be used Stabilized power supply Remote module Remote module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 3 Equipment list Product name Remote I O module Table 2 1 lists the equipment that configures the CC Link Model name QJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61QBT11
186. e Remote I O net mode Online Remote net mode gt Offline Online Remote I O net mode Offline Default Online Remote net mode All connect count 110 64 1 module Default 64 Device name Select from X M L B D W R or Remote input RX ZR Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R or ee based END i Device name Select from M L B T C ST D Remote register RWw W Ror ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R SB Special relay SB orZR Device name Select from M L B D W R SW Special register SW or ZR Retry count et y Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1to 10 1 module station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select p D continue Roses Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode setting CAsynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous 3 times Delay information settings 010190 0 Not specifigd i 8 Default 0 11 3 11 3 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Exclusive Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word Station No Station type station f t station select 64 11 4 Exclusive Intelligent device station station 4 E 2 Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter
187. e 2 channel output digital analog AJ65SBT 62DA Digital input 4000 to 4000 0 to 4000 converter module Analog output 10 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA Analog digital 4 channel input T 64AD Analog input 10 V to 10 V 20 mA to 20 mA copy ener module Digital output 2000 to 2000 0 to 4000 Ramos donee 4 channel voltage output station T 64DAV Digital input 2000 to 2000 2 stations Digital analog Analog output 10 V to 10 V converter module 4 channel current output T 64DAI Digital input 0 to 4000 Analog output 4 mA to 20 mA T D62 24 bit binary 5 12 24 V DC input type High speed 200 kpps 2 channel TT mE 4 stations counter module AJ65BT D62D S1 24 bit binary differential input type 400 kpps 2 channel For connecting thermocouple Temperature input 8 channels 1 station 2 c o e UJ 2 o e UJ gt gt E c o o e e UJ UJ AJ65BT 64RD3 For connecting Pt 100 3 wire type Temperature input 4 channels 4 stations For connecting Pt 100 4 wire type 5 1 4 4 Temperature input 4 channels AJ65BT 68TD Remote device station Number of readers writers that can be connected is 2 Monochrome liquid crystal type 2 colors A852GOT LWD LBD Resolution 320 X 240 dots Number of touch keys 300 STN color liquid crystal type 8 colors A852GOT SWD SBD Resolution 320 X 240 dots 2 or 4 stations Number of touch keys 300 Communication module for CC A8GT J61BT15 CC Lin
188. e Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n X 3 SL ms 20 X 1 X3 10 70 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw local station RWr This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the master station CPU device until the data is stored in the local station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X2 SL ms 20 3 2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM Xn LS X2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn LS X 2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master
189. e error Module ready Host data link status SW80 to SW83 Other station data link status X nO XnF Xni pH H H sw amp o 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 2 I O Signals for the PLC CPU This section explains the input output signals for the PLC CPU of the master local module 8 2 1 I O Signal list Table 8 1 shows a list of the I O signals The n in the table indicates the master local module s first I O number which is determined by both the installation position and the module installed before the master local module Example When the master local module s first I O number is X Y30 Xn0 to X n 1 F X30 to X4F YnO to Y n 1 F gt Y30 to Y4F Table 8 1 I O signal list Signal direction PLC CPU lt Master local module Signal direction PLC CPU Master local module Availability 2 Availability Input number Signal name Output number Signal name 5 Master station Local station Master station Local station xo Moduleerror _ O o Yo Hostdatalinkstatus w Use prohibited pol op _ w j Other station data ink status Hd Module ready o wF gt KR X S15 o im 2 5 5 5 5 Use prohibited T gt o 7 9 1 lt lt m o p aala era p p lt l
190. e is set to SWO XQ 5080 0 0 _ 6 4 RIFR U4 Ki H100 00 K10 App 25 App 25 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 6 RITO instruction The RITO instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data Em user File Direct JOO function register register module Instruction Execution symbol condition Command RITO eno Command RITO eRT m 2 m Set data Un number of the module 0 to FEH Intelligent device station number 1 to 64 R ffer specificati andom access buffer specification Binary 16 bits The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent device station specified by the master station or the random Between 0 and parameter setting value 1 access buffer Within the range of the Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored Device specified device Number of points to write 0to4096 to 4096 0to4096 Binary 16 bits 16 bits 1 The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer 2 No processing will be performed when set to 0 App 26 App 26 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RITO instruction Specified station Master station PLC CPU Master module Intelligent device station
191. e location for the same intelligent device station App 15 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIRCV instruction the completion device D2 and the status display device at completion D2 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRCV instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIRCV instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRCV instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing Status display device at completion END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program fE 4 E ON RIRCV instruction Completion device 2 Hn completion 4 Normal completion y RYn RXn Other end station send ready d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previou
192. e top surface of the module is covered with a protective film to prevent foreign objects such as wire burrs from entering the module during wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the System be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation b Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections of the solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation tube 6 Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module 7 Tighten the module mounting screws and terminal screws using torque within the following ranges Screw location Tightening torque range 1 Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed 2 Always make sure to power off the system in advance when removing the terminating resistor to charge the system If the terminating resistor is removed and mounted while the system is energized normal data transmission will not be guaranteed 7 2 2 Installation environment For further details see the user s
193. ead from the correct address of remote Check the sequence program input RX buffer memory Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote I O station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station 5 0071 e Check the number of connected modules 51 0072 13 1 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Unable to receive input from a remote I O station e Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SW009B e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check
194. ecific modules Select Selected station in 1 station No specify the station number and click Test execute When conducting a loop test do not perform write to buffer memory addresses 5E0n 608 13 17 13 17 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 4 H W Information when QJ61BT11 of function version B or later and SW6D5C GPPW E or later are combined This function displays the operation and setting statuses of the master module local modules and standby master module when QJ61BT11 of function version B or later and SW6D5C GPPW E or later are combined a Setting procedure Select a module by clicking Diagnostics System monitor and then click Module s Detailed Information HAW Information Module s Detailed Information x r Module 1 Module Name QJ61BT11 Product information 020410000000000 B 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot r Madule Information Module access Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type Status of 170 Address Verify Agreement Remote password setting r Eror Display Display format Present Error No Error HEX Error History C DEC The display sequence turn of the error history is displayed from an old error The error of the latest is displayed in the line in the cae under HAW Information Start monitor b
195. eck The following explains how to check the wiring status between the remote I O and external devices Example of wiring check Specify the Remote input RX for the master station to X1000 and the Remote output RY to Y1000 with the GX Developer Master station Remote I O station Remote station Station number 1 number Station number 2 number of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 AJ65BTB1 16D Input module AJ65BTB1 16T Output module a Checking the wiring between the input module and an external device 1 Turn ON the switch corresponding to the external device which is connected to the input module of station number 1 2 Using the GX Developer set X1000 in the Device field by choosing Online Monitor Device batch and then click on Start monitor 3 If X1000 is ON the connection between the input module and external device has been properly performed b Checking the wiring between the output module and an external device 1 Using the GX Developer set Y 1000 in the Device field for the Bit device by choosing Online Debug Device test and then click on FORCE ON 2 Ifthe connection between the output module and external device is properly performed the indicator lamp corresponding to the external device YOO is lit 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 6 T Branch Connection with the CC Link Dedicated C
196. eck the LED display on the corresponding local Is the corresponding local station performing data station link Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of remote Check the sequence program output RY buffer memory of the master station Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is data read from the correct address of remote input RX buffer memory of the local station Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules 51 0072 Check the parameters e Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B e Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F e Check the LED display on the corresponding local Is the corresponding local station performing data station link Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of remote output RY
197. ed as input data by the master station when local stations are operating thus it does not need to be saved in another device 4 34 4 34 4 FUNCTIONS Master station controlling Station number 1 0 MELSEC Q d When the standby master station becomes faulty and the master station controls the data link 1 Master station output Standby master station Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote Remote Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 X00 to XOF 00 to YOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the master station by the sequence program is sent to other stations as output data 2 Master station input Master station controlling Station number 1 0 Standby master station Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote put RX Remote output B RYOO tg RYOF RYJ to RY1F RY20 to RY2F Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 X10 to X1F X00 to XOF Data in the shaded areas in the master station is either input or retained according to the Operational settings in the network parameters 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Setting method
198. edgment status at standby master switching SB43 Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching ON ON OFF When SBBB is turned on the program switches RX to RY and RWr to RWw In addition the program turns SBO1 on 4 FUNCTIONS Master station MELSEC Q 6 Program example when the standby master function master station duplex function is used A program example is created under the following conditions when the standby master function master station duplex function is used a System configur Remote device station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 2 ation Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 b Parameter settings of the master station SSE as ae Mode Online Remote net mode gt 3 Retry count t ___ Delay infomation settings 1 0 Interrupt settings Interrupt settings c Parameter settings of the standby master station _ 2562 Operational settings _ Master station data link type 1 Mode Online Remote net mode Allconnectcout f 5 Retry count L interrupt settings Interupt settings T Special relay SB 4 FUNCTIONS Initial device set Control ladder when the master station is operating C
199. een changed without turning the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or resetting the PLC CPU Turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU 18 7 18 7 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 13 2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the ERR LED of the Master Station is Flashing or When Normal Data cannot be Sent Received During Data Link Do the parameter Settings and the installed system configuration match properly Revise the parameter settings or installed system configuration Are the master Station link special registers SW0080 to SW0083 other station data link status turned on Master station malfunction Are the master Station link special registers SW0098 to SWO009B station number overlap status turned on Check on master station side Check the module for which SW0098 to SWOO9B on Check the module for which SW0080 to SW0083 are on Check on slave station side station number switches set properly Are there any station numbers that are incompletely matched 2 Is the power on Turn on the power Set the station number switches properly Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch Is there a POWER LED on the module Corresponding module malfunction Is the supplied power within the specified range Set the supplied voltage to
200. elating to the standby master function The following explains the link special relays and registers relating to the standby master function These are stored in the buffer memory When the standby master station is controlling the data link its applicability is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station its applicability is identical to that of the local station a Link special relays SB The link special relays SB relating to the standby master function are as follows The figures in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer memory addresses and bit locations Example When the buffer memory address is 5EOH and the bit location is 0 BEOH 60 Table 4 5 List of link special relays relating to the standby master function 1 2 SB0001 5 0 b1 SBO000C 5 0 b12 SB0042 4 b2 SB0043 4 b3 x1 SB0046 4 b6 SB005A 5 5 b10 5 005 5 5 b11 SB005C 5 4 b12 Applicability O Applicable x Not applicable Description P Master Local station Offline station Gives refresh instruction for cyclic data after the data link control Refresh instruction at is transferred to the standby master station standby master switching 0 No instruction 1 Instructed Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master station that controls the data link to the master station tha
201. emote station Remote station Remote station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations EN Es s p A number 4 Station number 7 The station does not become data link faulty Local station Local station Master occupies occupies station 1 station 4 stations Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Remote station Remote station Remote station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations If a remote station a local station an intelligent device station or the standby master station that is set as an error invalid station is specified as a reserved station the reserved station function overrides the error invalid station setting function If errors are generated at all the stations when they are set as error invalid stations the ERR LED will light Setting method Set the error invalid station setting function in Station information settings of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan Scan synchronous function This function selects whether or not the link scan should be synchronized with the sequence scan For QJ61BT11 of the function version A it can be used only at the remote net mode 1 Synchronous mode Performs data linking using the scan
202. en the master station and local stations 11 1 Communication between the master station and remote device stations 10 1 Communication between the master station and remote I O stations 9 1 Communication buffer 8 15 Communication module for CC Link Conriectlon 2 iei ere iet 2 9 Communication with the remote I O stations 4 3 Communication with the local stations 4 10 Communication with the remote device stations nee ctis 4 5 Compact type analog digital converter module2 9 Compact type digital analog converter module2 9 Compact type remote I O module 2 6 Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure 8 19 Connecting the modules 7 9 Connection 3 1 CPU monitoring time setting 8 22 Creating a program 9 7 10 13 11 9 Current link scan time 8 25 Cyclic A 12 Index 1 D E Data link processing time 5 1 Data link 8 17 Data link restart acceptance 8 18 Data link restart comple
203. ence of a watchdog timer error in other stations watchdog timer error OFF No error status ON Error occurrence Indicates the fuse blown occurrence status at other stations 580082 Other station fuse SW0088 to SWO008B 5E8x b2 blown status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Detects changes in setting switches of other stations during data SB0083 Other station switch linking 8 b3 change status OFF No change ON Change detected Indicates the line status of the host Host line status OFF Normal ON Abnormal line disconnection Indicates whether there is a transient transmission error OFF No error ON Error occurrence Master station Indicates the transient transmission status of the master station transient transmission OFF Normal status ON Abnormal SB0080 Other station data link 5E8x 60 status SB0081 5 8 b1 SB0090 5 9 SB0094 Transient 9 b4 transmission status SB0095 5 9 b5 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 4 2 Link special registers SW Data is stored in the link special registers SWO000 to SW003F by the sequence program and data is automatically stored in SW0040 to SWO1FF The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory addresses When the standby master station is controlling the data link availability is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a loca
204. er of the standby master station set by parameter 0 No standby master station specification B RATE Setting of transmission speed MODE Mode setting status 13 19 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 5 H W Information when QJ61BT11 of function version A and SW5D5C GPPW E or earlier are combined This function displays the operation and setting statuses of the master module local modules and standby master module when QJ61BT 11 of function version A and SW5D5C GPPW E or earlier are combined a Setting procedure Select the module by clicking Diagnostics System monitor and then click Module s Detailed Information H W Information Information b H w LED Information 1 ss00 lt 1 uo mounting No Paramater mounting 2 0001 5 0002 6 b H W LED Information Start monitor Stop monitor Close The following information will be displayed in the H W LED information 1 SW0058 detailed LED display status 2 SW0058 detailed LED display status 3 SW0059 transmission rate setting c H W switch Information The following information will be displayed in the H W switch information 4 Set value for station number setting switch X10 Set value for station number setting switch X1 Set value for the transmission rate mode setting switch Station number for the correspo
205. error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range App 11 App 11 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 Program example When XO is turned ON this program stores 10 word data from DO to buffer memory address 100 and succeeding addresses of the intelligent device station number 1 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X Y40 to X Y5F When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO XO SW80 0 0 MOVP Ki D101 MOVP H4 D102 MOVP H100 D103 MOVP K10 D104 GP RIWT U4 D100 DO MO App 12 App 12 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 RIRCV instruction The RIRCV instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent device station and reads data from the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data E user File E XE function register module Instruction Execution symbol condition disent RIRCV L 4sRiRcv Un o 63 D2 Command RIRCV GP RIRCV Un 51 D1 S2 D2 Set data Setti
206. es can be controlled by the PLC CPU 1 By distributing each module to an equipment device such as a conveyor line and a machine device the wiring efficiency of the entire system can be accomplished 2 On off information of input output and numeric data that are handled by modules can easily be sent and received at high speed 3 By connecting multiple PLC CPUS a simple distributed system can be configured 4 By connecting various devices made by Mitsubishi s partner manufacturers the System can provide flexible solutions to meet a wide range of user needs Master station PLC CPU ro 91979 Remote I O station 55 Device manufactured by of our Remote device station Remote I O station Local station Intelligent device station PLC CPU o 9 e Master station The station that controls the data link system Remote I O station The remote station that handles bit unit data only Remote device station remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data only The station having a PLC CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other local stations Intelligent device station The station that can perform transient transmission Local station RES 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC
207. etting Asynchronous Delay infomation settings 30 Station information settings Station information Remote device station initial Initial settir Interrupt settings Interrupt setting Indispensable settings setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded Aleadyset Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear H End setup Cancel Open contact LD QO6H Host station dnd vwe NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Setthe No of boards in for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 modules Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in Example Set 1 module b Setthe Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name CC LinkM Data link disorder station setting T Hold input data Cancel d Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not che
208. ettings of the Check the parameters station standby master station does not start up modules that do not start up Are there any overlap station numbers Check the station number setting Is the station set as an error invalid station Check the parameters Faulty stations cannot be detected z Is the station number overlapped elsewhere Check the station number setting Check that the station number of the local station Check the station number setting switches and including the number of occupied stations is not 65 parameter of the local station standby master The local station standby master station does not or more station start up and the ERR LED turns on Check that the parameter of the master station that will return to the system by the standby master Check the parameter of the master station function has not been rewritten Can the faulty station be identified using the other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 e Check the switch settings for the faulty station Check that the cable is properly wired Faulty stations are generated depending on 5 d e Check that the shield of the cable is grounded Nt If the transmission rate is reduced to a lower level transmission rate Connect the terminal resistor that matches the such as 156 kbps can communication be f eHoniod whol producing cable type used to the terminal stations located P s at each end of the CC Link system Check the error code
209. f remote station temporary error invalid cancel instruction OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgment completion status of remote station temporary error invalid cancel instruction OFF Not executed ON Temporary error invalid station cancellation complete Indicates the line test request acknowledgment status OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged EHEN fete fet pepe 2 mE 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only x3 Link special relay added to the module having the serial No whose first five digits are 03082 or later 8 18 8 18 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 3 Link special relay list 3 5 Availability p eme Available x Not se Number Name Description Onne Master station Local station he lin mpletion status 580040 Line test complete ndicates the line test completi BE4 b13 status OFF Not executed i ON Test complete ___ Indicates the parameter information read request acknowledgment Parameter information 9B004E read acknowledgment 5 4 b14 sietus OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the completion status of the parameter information read Parameter information SB004F reat completion request 5 4 b15 OFF Not executed ON Test complete Indicates the offline test execution status Offline test st
210. for each module Remote input RX and remote output RY PLC CPU X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 10 13 Remote device station station number 1 AJ65BT 64AD to RX0 to RX0 RX00 RX1F RX10 to RX10 to RYO RY1F to RY10 10 13 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr PLC CPU Remote device station station number 1 AJ65BT 64AD For write RWw0 Averaging process setting RWw1 CH1 Average time number of times RWw2 CH2 Average time number of times RWwA CHA Average time number of times RWwS5 Data format RWw6 conversion enable disable setting RWws CH3 Average time number of times RWw7 Use prohibited For read D1000 RWr0 CH1 Digital output value RWr1 CH2 Digital output value RWr2 CH3 Digital output value RWr3 CH4 Digital output value RWrA Error code RWr5 Use prohibited RWr6 Use prohibited RWr7 Use prohibited 10 14 10 14 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q OF x K4 Read data link status of each station
211. fresh gt 6 Automatic refresh 9 Automatic refresh 1 3 Remote input Tink scan RX Buffer memory Remote register RWr Remote device station Remote input RX Handshaking signals Such as remote READY and initial data processing request flag Remote RY Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag Remote register RWw Remote register RWw Numeric data for averaging processing setting A D conversion enable disable setting etc Remote register RWr Numeric data such as digital output values detected temperature value etc 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system automatically starts up Remote input 2 The remote input RX of a remote device station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote input RX Handshaking signals s
212. g boards Set by the sequence program MAIN H E Device comment 1 2 3 4 Eu Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational settinas Operational settings 2 Network pe Local station v ES Ey Device memory Master station data link type z E E Device init Mode Online Remote net mode gt All connectcount Remote 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register R wr D1000 Remote registe RWw D2000 Special relay SB SBO Special register SW swo Retry count Automatic reconnction station count Wait master station No PLC down select i i i Scan mode setting s Y Delay infomation settings Station information settings Indispensable settings setting Aleadyset Setifitismeeded Noselting Already set 4 gt Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear Su End setup Cancel Ready Q06H Host station NUM 11 8 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 4 Creating a Program This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master and local stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the master station PLC CPU and the devices of the local station PLC CPU The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Remote input RX and remote output RY Local station station number 1 Master station PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 statio
213. ges SW0074 to SWO077 When SB0074 changes SWO0061 When SB0061 changes SW0078 to SWO07B When SB0075 changes SW0062 SW0080 to SW0083 When SB0080 changes Updated independently regardless SWO0067 SW0088 to SWOO8B E P TER Updated independently regardless SWOA independently regardless E eJ 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation check using a system configuration example 9 1 Configuring a System As shown below a system with three connected remote I O stations is used as an example Master Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QU61BT11 QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P IN Terminal resistor Remote I O station station number 1 Remote I O station station number 2 Remote station station number J 7 16D J Meri 7 16T J MsBTBIMeDT 16DT 5 e d Inputmodule e module Output module module VOmodue module Terminal resistor 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 1 1 Setting the master station Settings of the master station switches are shown below 11 QJ61BT11 RUN L RUN MST S MST SD RD ERR OL ERR STATION NO Station number setting
214. gs at automatic CC Link startup The following lists the contents of the default automatic refresh parameter settings and network parameter settings when the automatic CC Link starts up Content of default automatic refresh parameter settings Q12H Q25HCPU side local station side local station side RX0000 to RXO7FF X400 to X7FF RY0000 to RYO7FF Y400 to Y7FF W1E00 to W1EFF RWr00 to RWrFF W600 to W6FF RWr00 to RWrFF RWw00 to RWwFF W700 to W7FF SB0000 to SBO1FF SB200 to SB3FF SW0000 to SWOiFF SW200 to SW3FF Content of default network parameter settings Mode setting Online remote net mode Total number of d 64 stations connected stations Number of retries Number of automatic 1 module return modules Standby master station 2e No standby master station specified number CPU down specification Data link stop when a master station CPU error occurs Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay time setting Delay time is not specified 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Content of buffer memory size specification for intelligent device station 128 words 1 If an automatic CC Link startup is performed on a system that includes a local station the local station will occupy one station during operation Make sure to perform line tests for all stations if an automatic CC Link startup is performed and changes such as replacement of a module etc are made to the System during data link operation Stations whose data link h
215. h the station information parameter Invalid station specified error parameter B38E Communic tion buffer buffers in the station information communication buffers to 4 k ignment error assignment erro parameter exceeded 4 k words words or less Q O 1 The total size of the automatic update Set the total size of the B38F is eiie Ud puo buffer in the station information automatic update buffer to 4 k 9 parameter exceeded 4 words words or less Standby master station The standby master station parameter Specify the standby master a specification error parameter was set to a value other than 1 64 station to a aue range from 1 to 64 B391 Retry count setting error The retry count parameter was settoa a value within the range parameter value other than 1 to 7 from 1 to 7 The operation when the CPU is down B392 Edd Pec Specification parameter was set to a Set 0 or 1 P value other than O 1 Scan mode specification error The scan mode parameter was set to a B393 parameter value other than O or 1 Seo 0 1 Number of automatic return The number of automatic return stations B394 stations setting error parameter was set to a value other than eee e NN i 1 10 parameter 1to 10 parameter with the station information parameter duplicated The station information parameter setting does not meet the following condition 16
216. he Middle position Set the transmission rate mode setting switch for the master local module to A to E the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Power ON Operate the CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to RESET RESET L CLR 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR MST LED is flashing test in progress To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q From the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master local module and the CPU module When normal The CPU ERR LED flashes to check the operation of the watchdog timer When abnormal The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes Replace the module since there is a hardware malfunction Check once again to see that the terminal resistor that comes with the module is connected between terminals DA and DB When the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU is set to RUN and a hardware test is performed the system status become SP UNIT DOWN and the PLC CPU stops to check the operation of the watch dog timer function Make sure that the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU is set to STOP and then perform the hardware test 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated Cables This se
217. he Appendix 2 3 Intelligent buffer memory of that station device station Automatically performs handshaking with the RISEND specified station and writes data into the buffer Appendix 2 4 memory of that station Reads data in the automatic update buffer of RIFR 2 Appendix 2 5 the specified station Writes data into the automatic update buffer of RITO 2 6 the specified station Sets the network parameters for the master Master station RLPASET f Appendix 2 7 station and starts up the data link Execute the dedicated instructions while the data link is being performed If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline no error will occur but the execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 1 RIRD instruction The RIRD instruction reads the data for the specified points from the buffer memory or the PLC CPU device of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data Ed T user File EXE function register module Leen Instruction Execution bol diti symbol condition Command RIRD G RIRD Un S D1 D2 Command ABD Set data pos number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device Device name Within the range of the D1
218. he RLPASET instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns On and OFF depending on the completion status of the RLPASET instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RLPASET instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing When all the stations are normal END END END processing processing processing END END END END processing processing processing processing F T F Data li Host data link status X01 Refresh instruction SB03 Data link stop SB02 Data link stop complete 7 5845 RLPASET instruction Direction device Complete device Status display device at completion Sequence program Refresh stop gt lt Refresh start lt Data link start RLPASET instruction completion nk stop Ep GY y Abnormal completion T af When all the stations are faulty END END END processing processing processing END END END END processing processing processing processing Refresh stop Refresh start Data link stop gt Host data link status X01 Refresh instruction 5803 Data link stop SB02 Data link stop complete SB45 RLPASET instruction Direction dev
219. he setting for number of points to write n3 is outside of the setting range When the station number specified with n1 does not exist 4100 3 Program example Master module Intelligent device station PLC CPU Start I O number 40 Station number 1 Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory 3004 Automatic update buffer memory When is turned ON the following example program writes 10 word data from DO to the automatic update buffer offset value starting from 100 400 of the intelligent device station in the master module When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO X0 5080 0 0 _ gt 0 U4 K1 H100 DO K10 App 28 App 28 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 7 RLPASET instruction Set the network parameter to the master station and start up the data link Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data Eu user File Direct JOO function register register module Instruction Execution symbol condition command RLPASET GRLPASET Un St 52 3 54 55 D I 4 Command C L c c RLPASET _ P ALPASET Un 51 82 83 54 55 D E Set data Setting range Data type iron n n
220. heck the other station data link status SWO0080 to SW0083 for a data link error The station number setting of the station where a data link error has occurred may be wrong 2 Station number 0 station overlap checking Checks whether or not more than one station whose station number setting is 0 exists in the system 1 When duplicating the ERR LED lights up an error code is stored in SWOOE6A switch setting status and SBOO6A switch setting status turns on 2 By correcting the switch setting to normal and restarting the data link the ERR LED is turned off and the data in SWOO6A can be cleared 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 12 Multiple PLC System Support This function allows monitoring and reading writing programs from to any CPU in a multiple PLC system mounted with the QJ61BT11 via AJ65BT G4 S3 or other station CPUs This is illustrated by the following example It is possible to monitor CPU4 of the local station from peripheral device A connected to the AJ65BT G4 S3 and read the programs of CPU2 of the master station from peripheral device B connected to CPUS of the local station This function cannot be used with function version A Master station Peripheral device A Terminal resistor AJ65BT G4 S3 Reading of programs Terminal resistor Peripheral device B Access source CPUs must be control PLCs in order to make an access
221. hen changing parameters by the dedicated instruction 8 17 Remote device station A 12 1 1 2 9 Remote device station communication 1 2 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function 1 8 4 44 Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction 8 18 Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result 8 24 Remote l O 2 6 Remote I O net mode A 12 Remote 1 station A 12 1 1 2 6 Remote I O station communication 1 2 Remote input RX sss 8 7 Remote A 12 Remote net mode A 12 4 52 Remote output 8 7 Remote register RWr 8 11 Remote register 8 11 Remote Station A 12 Reserved station function 4 54 Reserved station specified StatllS 2 3 32 2 207i dei eit Toe o Quia de 8 20 8 25 RIRGM a Lern te rec it App 13 RRD zd et ae App 3 23 RISEND 18
222. hen the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Lnik OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 E 1 067 0 5 5 12 3 X 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME 5 3 2 Local station lt local station MELSEC Q 1 Local station local station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is executed by one local station unt il a response from another local station is received Expression Maximum a RIRD OT value instruction LS X BC read points 16 16 1 067 SL ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time LS QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant Transmission rate 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps m 8 v m ow SL Target station sequence program scan time 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link 1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QOGHCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 X 12 3 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms b RIWT instruction LS X BC wri
223. i 1 i 1 For station 8 1684 For station number 5 L E94 i 169 number5 to to to For station f 15C4 RX7CF to 7 Cd 1DC For station number 63 1505 RX7DF to RX7DO Pod og 1DD4f number 63 For station 15EH RX7EF to AX7EO IDEs For station number 64 15 RX7FF to RX7FO i 10 J number 64 1 1 i 1 1 1 8 PROGRAMMING St number St number 6 ES EMI ation Buffer memory address EOx to E1H E2u to E3H 4 to 5 to E7H 8 to 9 to to FOH to F1H 2 to 4 to F5u F6H to F7H F8H to 9 ation Buffer memory address 160 to 161H 162u to 163 164 to 165H 166u to 167H 168 to 169H 16 to 16B 16CH to 16D 16 to 16F 170H to 171 172 to 173H 174 to 175 176u to 177 178 to 179 MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number address 14 FAH to FBH 15 FCH to FDH 16 FEH to FFH 17 100 to 101H 18 102H to 103H 19 104u to 105u 20 106u to 107H 21 108 to 109H 22 10Au to 10BH 23 10 to 100 24 10 to10FH 25 110 111 26 112 to 113 Local station Station Buffer memory number address 27 114
224. ication during line test 1 The station number setting switch setting of the module is other than 0 to 64 Alternatively the last station number is greater than 64 Multiple master stations exist on the same line Alternatively line noise was detected at power on A hardware error was detected There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station Secure a communication buffer area with a parameter Set the communication buffer Size of the corresponding station within the range Set to the remote net ver 1 mode remote I O net mode Set to the remote net ver 1 mode remote I O net mode Check the cable and the corresponding station Check the station number and the number of occupied stations of the module Reduce the number of master stations on the same line to one Alternatively check the line status There is most likely a hardware error in either the QJ61BT11 the CPU module the base unit or other modules Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Wait for a while before transmitting again transient overload status Check the operation of the BFFE CPU monitoring timer time out The CPU monitoring timer timed out P target station 13 14 13 14 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 13 4 CC Link Diagnostics Using the GX Developer Check the status of each module after all the modules have been connected using CC Link dedicated cables and verify that data li
225. ice Complete device Status display device at completion App 34 Return to system processing RLPASET instruction eu completion E ooo uu NE ON QN Abnormal f scompletior 4 Return to system App 34 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 4 Operation error In the following cased an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Description of operation error 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used When the number of points for data used in the instruction exceeds the available range or storage data and constants of a device specified by the instruction exceeds the available range including dummy devices The number of points required for each data is shown below Control data Slave station setting data Reserved station specification data Error invalid station specification data 8 points 64 points 4 points 4 points Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data 78 points Example Assume that data link registers DO to D12287 are available for the QO2CPU If the device head number of the slave station setting data is set to D12284 because there are only 4 slave stations the PLC CPU nonetheless checks the range from D12284 to D122347 for 64 stations
226. ice station positioning start positioning complete etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using remote registers RWw and RWr Automatic refresh Master station Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Intelligent device station MELSEC Q Servo amplifier Automatic refresh b Transient transmission Read RIRD or written RIWT operation of the intelligent device station PLC CPU buffer memory can be performed at any timing Master station RIWT Transient transmission area Link scan Remote input input RX RX Remote Cink sean Remote 7 gt output output RY RY 4 o Demote Link scan Remote register register RWw RWw LU Remote Link scan Remote register register RWr RWr Intelligent device station Transient transmission Buffer memory Transient transmission 1 OVERVIEW Master station NE MELSEC Q 5 Parameter setting by GX Developer or the dedicated instruction There are two parameter setting methods the parameters can either be set by GX Developer or by using a dedicated instruction see Sections 4 2 5 and 4 2 6 The following table lists the differences between the two setting methods P
227. ieee as Check the master module local module and standby master module individually to see if they operate normally hardware test ZI See Section 7 4 Connect the modules with the CC Link dedicated cable Connect a terminal resistor that matches the cable type to the modules located at both ends ZI See Section 7 5 Check items prior to turning power ON Check the module installation status Check the input power voltage Verify that the CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP Verify that the CPU RESET switch is set to the middle position Set the switches on the master module local module and standby master module see Sections 7 3 and 7 7 Station number setting see Section 7 7 1 Transmission rate mode setting see Section 7 7 2 Turn the power ON When performing parameter setting with dedicated instruction Set the parameters with the GX Developer see Section 6 3 Network parameters see sections 6 3 1 and 6 3 3 Automatic refresh parameters see sections 6 3 2 and 6 3 4 Set the PLC parameter with the GX Developer see Section 6 4 Create a program in which the RLPASET instruction is used see Section 6 4 To the next page To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q From the previous page From the previous page Register the parameters to the PLC CPU Registe
228. ime ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 3 Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the data for the CPU device is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole num
229. in the master station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3X2 10 36 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn X 2 SL ms 20 X 1 X2 10 50 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 3 SL ms 20 3 3 10 39 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time se
230. ion 4 FUNCTIONS Controlling Controlling the data link of the CC Link system Standby Data link control by the master station Master station Remote device station Station number 2 Controlling Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 NS MELSEC Q Standing by in case the station controlling the data link of the CC Link system becomes faulty Standby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Master station Remote device station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 X A Cyclic communication Standby master station Station number 1 0 1 Controlling Cyclic beetfnunication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station returns to normal mode and system operation Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down Master station Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Station number 2 Standby Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 V N Standby master
231. ion SWO0071 communication 6714 station number b15 6014 bi3 b12 Reserved station 13 specified status swoo75 32 29 SW0077 64 Stores the error invalid station setting status 0 Other than error invalid station 1 Error invalid station SW0078 678 SW0079 b15 014 6013 b12 6794 Error invalid station SW0078 SWO07A specified status 3 SW0079 67 SW007A SW007B SW007B 67 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 4 Link special register list 5 7 Availability 6 O Available Not available Number Description Online Master station Local station Indicates the temporary error invalid status 0 Normal status SW007C T 1 Temporary error invalid status 67 SW007D b15 614 bi3 b12 670 Temporary error 16 15 14 13 SWO07E invalid status 32 31 30 29 67 48 47 46 45 SW007F 64 63 62 61 64530 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the data link status of each station 0 Normal SW0080 1 Data link error occurrence 6801 SWO081 b15 bi4 b13 b12 b2 bi bO 6814 Other station data link swooso 16 15 14 13 4 3 2 1 6 SWo082 status Swoo81 32 31 29 20 19 18 17 682 SWoo82 48 47 46 45 36 35 34 33 SWO0083 SWO0083 64
232. ion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RISEND instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program sr t rere ON the RISEND NN RISEND Instruction ON Completion device 5555555555 ON Abnormal completion Narmal Status display OFF eee device at completion Send completion OFF RYn RXn OFF Receive completion d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RISEND instruction is 10 steps f The send buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 2 Operation error In the following cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO auo Mem the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4004 When the ins
233. ion to For receiving device standby master Read only 8 3 2 2 991 Local station stations For receiving For the local station Stores the receive data from the master station 992 to Use prohibited 1503 1504 Section to Link special relay SB Stores the data link status 1535 write may 8 3 2 3 be disabled 1536 Link special register 7 depending coma to SW Stores the data link status wp 2047 3204 2048 to Use prohibited 2559 2560 The specified data is stored and used by Read write Section to Random access buffer RS transient transmission enabled 8 3 2 5 4095 Stores the send and receive data and control 4096 data when performing transient transmission 7 Read write Section to Communication buffers communication using the communication enabled 8 3 2 6 8191 buffers with the local station standby master station and intelligent device station 8192 Stores the automatic update data when Automatic update performing transient transmission with the Read write Section 12287 buffer AJ65BT R2 communication using the enabled automatic update buffer to Use prohibited 20479 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors O Available Not available 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 3 2 Buffer memory details The following explains the details of items shown in Table 8 2 Buffer Memory List in Section 8 3 1 1
234. ion 4 4 10 Checks for the overlapping of occupied stations and whether or not more than one module having a station number setting of 0 Section 4 4 11 exists in the system Station number overlap checking function Allows monitoring and reading writing programs from to any Multiple PLC system support CPU in a multiple PLC system mounted with the QJ61BT11 via Section 4 4 12 AJ65BT G4 S3 or other station CPUs 4 Table 4 4 lists the functions for transient transmission Table 4 4 List of the functions for transient transmission Specifies a counterpart and communicates at an arbitrary timing Section 4 5 1 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 Basic Functions This section explains the basic functions of the QJ61BT11 4 2 1 Communication with the remote I O stations Two types of communication modes are available for the CC Link system remote net mode and remote I O net mode 1 Remote net mode In this mode it is possible to communicate with all stations remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Thus various systems can be configured according to their applications 2 Remote I O net mode In this mode a high speed cyclic transmission is performed for a system consisting only of the master station and remote I O stations Because of this the link scan time can be shortened when compared to the remote net mode The following provides an overview of the c
235. ion Remote Remote occupies Reserved device station X YOO to 1F station device station 4 stations station occupies occupies occupies occupies 1 station 2 station 1 station 4 stations ls 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual ie MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 1815 Z Project Edi Convert View Onine Diagnostics Toole Window la xl ojee a e v 1516 amp s sel P vi E S 060301 Master statior E Eg Program No of boards in 1 x Boards Blank no setting 0 boards Set by the sequence program E MAIN Device comment 2 3 4 amp s Parameter Stattl 0 No 0000 PLC paramete Operational settings Operational settings IE Network para T Master station z E Device memory Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start z I Device init lode Online Remote net mode v All connecteount 5 Remote input AX Remote outpul BIY Remote register Wi Remote register Ww Special relayiSB Special reaisterfSw Retry count 5 Automatic reconnction station count 2 Wait master station No PLC down select Stop Scan mode s
236. ion after the function version B is used and the QJ61BT11 n in the model name is 6 or greater When the QJ61BT11 is installed to the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU n should be 7 or greater 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 2 Notes on the system configuration The system should be designed with the following considerations to prevent mis input from the remote I O modules 1 When powering on and off Start the data link after turning on the power to the remote I O modules Turn off the power to the remote I O modules after stopping the data link Data link start Data link stop During operation Master module data link status During stop ON Remote I O module power status OFF 2 During momentary power failure of the remote I O modules When a momentary power failure occurs in the power 24 V DC being supplied to the remote I O modules mis input may occur a Cause for mis input due to a momentary power failure The remote I O module hardware uses the power by internally converting the module power 24 V DC to 5 V DC When a momentary power failure occurs in a remote I O module the following condition occurs Time for the 5 V DC power in the remote I O module to turn off gt Response time for input module on off Therefore mis input occurs when a refresh is performed within the time indicated by 1 in the figure below Remote I O module 1 module power supply and input external supply power Remote I O mo
237. ion number setting of the network parameter standby master station number of the master station If an error has occurred change the parameter setting of the master station or the station number setting switch setting of the standby master station and then reset the PLC CPU of the standby master station 9 If the terminal block of the master station is removed and then replaced in its original position without turning the power off when the master station is controlling the data link both the master and standby master stations operate as master stations An error occurs since the data link control has been transferred to the standby master station ERR LED lights up h When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station the ERR LED of the standby master station flashes This is because the station number of the standby master station will change from the one set with a parameter to 0 and the standby station becomes nonexistent Data link itself is performed normally To avoid this situation set the standby master station to be an error invalid station i number and range of devices that will be saved by the sequence program among the data sent from the station operating as the master station to the station operating as the standby station may differ according to the system used 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Link special relays registers SB and SW r
238. ion procedure Setting range Execute Only set use as a memo when the execution conditions are the same as when the execution flag is set as Execute but the content of execution is different Default Execute 3 Operational condition Specify whether new settings or the previous settings are used for the initialization conditions Setting range Set new Same as prev set Default Set new When Same as prev set is selected the processing is performed as follows Example RX1 0 RY3 Mov K15 RWw2 4 Executional condition settings Condition Device Set the device to be used for the initialization condition Setting range RX SB 5 Executional condition settings Device Number Set the device number to be used for the initialization condition Setting range When RX is selected 0 to 7F H When SB is selected 0 to FF H 6 Executional condition settings Execute Condition Set the conditions under which initialization is performed Setting range ON OFF 7 Details of execution Write Device Set the device to which the contents of the initial setting are written Setting range RY RWw 8 Details of execution Device Number Set the device number to which the contents of the initial settings are written Setting range When RY is selected 0 to 7F H When RWw is selected 0 to OF 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 Details of execution Write Data Set the contents of the initial settings Setting range
239. ion procedure SBOO5F does not turn on If there is a faulty station turn off the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD according to the completion status of the other stations 10 11 10 11 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 4 Setting with the sequence program Reference For reference an example setting performed with the sequence program is shown below XOF xi 0 LB MM gwv o sw0 9 CALL 12 FEND P10 X1018 13 SET 1001 SET Y1000 WOVP K50 D2002 MOVP 1000 02003 MOVP H604 D2000 WOVP D2005 H7 D2006 SET Y1018 SET Y1019 X1018 29 RST Y1018 X1019 31 RST Y1019 X101B 1000 33 01000 01500 Ki X1001 BMOV 01001 01501 Ki X1002 BMOV 01002 01502 Ki X101A 52 BMOV DI004 01504 Ki Y101A 58 RET 59 END 10 12 10 12 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 4 Creating a Program MELSEC Q This section shows a program used to control remote device stations The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input output and remote registers between the PLC CPU devices and the remote device station The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used For detailed information about each remote device station see the User s Manual Details
240. ions SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station 5 0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Unable to receive data to the remote register RWr in R Check the parameters i Is the corresponding station set as a reserved in a remote device station station Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Are there any overlap station numbers Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written from the correct address of remote register RWw buffer memory Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter inform
241. is running 1 11 1 11 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The system configuration for the CC Link is described below 2 1 System Configuration 2 A total of 64 remote I O stations remote device stations local stations standby master stations or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master station However the following conditions must be satisfied 1 1 X a 2 X b 3 X c 4 X d lt 64 a Number of modules occupying 1 station b Number of modules occupying 2 stations c Number of modules occupying 3 stations d Number of modules occupying 4 stations 2 16 X A 54 X B 88 X C x 2304 A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 1 module for each system 26 A A 4 X d Master station Master station Master station Local station Local station Local station d i L A1SJ61QBT11 mI E WAR W A1SJ61BT11 i A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 SUBTBTH AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 Gielen AJ61QBT1
242. istance and the station to station cable length If wiring is done other than as specified accurate transmission of data cannot be guaranteed Be sure to fix communication cables or power supply cables leading from the module by placing them in the duct or clamping them Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may hang or shift allowing them to be accidentally pulled which may cause a module malfunction and cable damage e When removing the communication cable or power supply cable from the module do not pull the cable When removing the cable with a connector hold the connector on the side that is connected to the module When removing the cable connected to the terminal block first loosen the screws on the part that is connected to the terminal block Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the module or cable STARTING AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify each module Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module Do not touch the connector while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning or retightening terminal screws and module installation screws Not doing so may cause failure or malfu
243. itch Setting button in the I O assignment setting screen to display the screen shown to the left Set the input format to hexadecimal and enter 0100 for switch 4 If switch 4 has not been set or a value other than 0100 is entered the RLPASET instruction completes with an error In this case the QJ61BT11 with the smallest start I O number seen from the PLC CPU starts CC Link automatically Do not make any settings other than for switch 4 Normal operation cannot be guaranteed if settings other than for switch 4 are made 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2 Program example Refresh of SB SW SMAOQ FROM HO H5E4 K48B40 FROM HO H640 540 Parameter setting iE SB6E 23 KS No instruction gt Control data M300 MOV 0 MOV 15 MOV 3 MOV 3 MOV 1 MOV 0 MOV 0 MOV 0 Slave station setting data M300 MOV H2101 MOV H102 MOV H103 Reserved station specification data Hi 79 ir 4 Error invalid station specification data Hi Hee iy 2 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M300 MOV H64 MOV H64 MOV H Parameter registration data link startup M300 135 E s RLPASET uo 00 D10 D50 060 D70 Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M301 167 RST M302 SET SET M302 Performs abnormal completion processing Parameter setting change Parameter change instruction SBGE f ti 6 18 K28 K443 M300 00 01 2 D3 D4 05 06
244. k I F module for GOT for remote device station Link connection PC interface board ABOBD J61BT13 CC Link interface board for DOS V PC for PCI bus slot 1 or 4 station s Local station Computer link function REM RS 232C 1 channel statio For positioning control pulse chain output 2 axes independent simultaneous dual axes dual axis linear 4 stations interpolation dual axis arc interpolation Intelligent device Communication station Link I F le fi T 7 module for CC n y moguls is o9 1 or 4 station s for intelligent device station Link connection See the CC Link Partner Association homepage http www cc link org for a list of products by partner manufacturers 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 4 How to check the function version and serial No The following describes how to check the function version and serial No 1 How to check the function version and serial No of the QJ61BT11 a Checking the SERIAL column of the rating plate on the module side MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI Serial No first 5 digits MODEL Function version SERIAL 02092 0000000000 B LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ c 2M MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN b See Section 13 4 for how to check the function version with GX Developer 2 2 5 About Version 1 10 Version 1 10 modules have a uniform station to station cable length of 20 cm or more by improving the restrictions on the conventional statio
245. l station availability is identical to that of a local station Table 8 4 Link special register list 1 7 Availability ur Available x Not available Number Description Online Offline Master station Local station Select whether multiple temporary error invalid stations are specified Multiple temporary 00 Specifies multiple stations indicated by SW0004 to Swo0003 error invalid station SUOMI 6034 specification 01 to 64 Specifies a single station from 1 to 64 The specified number indicates the station number of a temporary error invalid station Specifies a temporary error invalid station 0 Not specified as a temporary error invalid station 1 Specified as a temporary error invalid station SW0004 6044 SW0005 b15 014 b12 b3 b2 T 605 emporary error swoo04 invalid station SW0005 51 0006 specification 3 6061 5 0006 SW0007 SW0007 6071 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Sets the station for which line tests are executed SW0008 Line test station 0 Entire system executed for all stations 6084 setting 01 to 64 Specified station only Default value 0 Sets the monitoring time when a dedicated instruction is used SWo009 Moritoring time Default value 10 seconds 609 settin Setting range 0 to 360 seconds 9 The monitoring time of 360 seconds will be used if a value outside of the above setting range is specified
246. le 4 2 lists the functions for improving system reliability Table 4 2 List of the functions for improving system reliability Disconnects the module that cannot continue the data link Slave station cut off function because of power off and continues the data link with only the Section 4 3 1 normal modules When a module which has been disconnected from the data link Automatic return function because of power off returns to the normal status it Section 4 3 2 automatically joins the data link Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an Section 4 3 3 Sets the data link status when an error that enables the Sor operation to continue occurs at the master station PLC CPU Setting the status of input data from Sets the status clear hold of the input receive data from a Shiva dd ection 4 3 a data link faulty station station that became data link faulty because of power off Continues the data link by switching to the standby master Standby master function 9 xd Section 4 3 5 station when a problem occurs in the master station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Table 4 3 lists the handy functions Table 4 3 List of the handy functions Description Reference section Remote device station initialization Performs initial setting of remote device station using GX E ection 4 4 procedure registration function Developer Issues events when the conditions set by GX Developer are established and ca
247. lid station 9 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 614 613 b12 Setting for 1 io 64 modules 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The default parameter setting is No error invalid station specification for all stations x5 Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data 6 Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station local station or intelligent device station that occupies 2 or more stations The reserved station specification is given the higher priority if both error invalid station and reserved station specifications are made for the same station Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Set data Specify assignments of buffer memory size at transient Send receive transmission to local stations and intelligent device stations buffer no setting Receive buffer size Settings for the first module 40 to 1000 Automatic refresh 0 word no buffer size setting 64 to 4096 words Send buffer size Setting for 1 to 26 modules Automatic refresh Send buffer size buffer PE Receive buffer size Settings for the 26th module no setting Automatic refresh 804 to 10004 0 word no The default parameter settings are send buffer size 40n 2 setting receive buffer size 40h automatic refresh buffer size 804 128
248. local communication status of the status of the station with a error local station local station communication error 1 If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions Hold applies here If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer Clear applies here when the RY refresh device is set to Y or Hold applies when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y 2 When the RY refresh device is set to Y for the local station that has stopped only the receive area from the stopped local station is cleared the receive area is retained when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations When data link for Clear Clear By external the entire system is Undefined signals Undefined Hold All points OFF 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 5 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Table 5 2 lists the status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Table 5 2 The status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Remote device station Local station standby master stati
249. matic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5 The output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is output automatically for each link scan to remote I O stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 3 Station number 4 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station YAF to Y10 RY7FF to YOF to YOO e When setting the automatic refresh parameters be sure to specify Y for the remote output RY refresh device If any value other than Y e g M or L is specified when the CPU stops the status of the device before the stop is retained as is For the method to stop a data link see Section 4 4 10 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and the remote device stations In the communication with remote device stations the signals for handshaking with remote device stations initial data request flag error reset request flag etc are communicated using remote input RX and remote output RX Numeric data averaging processing specification digital output value etc is communicated using remote register RWw and remote register RWr PLC CPU Master station Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters EA Network parameters Automatic refresh 4 utomatic re
250. matically reconnect to the data link when they return to the normal status Setting method Set the Automatic reconnection station count value in the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station PLC CPU Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error This function sets the data link status when the master station PLC CPU falls into an error that stop the operation It is possible to continue the data link among the local stations 1 The data link continues when the master station PLC CPU falls into an error that enables to continue the operation 2 If a standby master station is being set the data link will not continue when the master station PLC CPU is down even when the data link status at CPU down is set to Continue The standby master function overrides and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station Setting method Set the above data link status with the PLC down select value in the network parameters using GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS 4 3 4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station This function sets the input receiving data from a data link faulty station 1 Applicable i
251. mber3 165 gt For station E7 number4 For station J 1664 number4 167 gt E8 For station E9u number 5 For station J 1681 number 5 1694 N 15C4 For station 15Du number 63 For station J 10 number 63 1DD gt 15 For station 15F number 64 For station 10 number 64 M 8 PROGRAMMING Station Buffer memory number address 1 160H to 161 162H to 163H 164 to 165 166 to 167 168 to 169 16 16 7 16 160 16 16 170 171 172 173 174 to 175 176 to 177 178 to 179 10 11 12 13 Station Buffer memory address 0 to E1H 2 to 4 to E5H to E7H 8 to 9 EAn to EBH to EDH EEn to EFH FOH to F1H 2 to 4 to 5 to F7H F8u to 9 number EN 8 M MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number address 14 17Au to 17BH 15 17CH to 17DH 16 17 17FH 17 180 to 181 18 182 to 183 19 184 185 20 186 to 187 21 188 189 22 18 to 18 23 18 180 24 18 to 18 25 190 191 26 192 to 193 Local station Station Buffer memory number address
252. me only when there is a faulty station including error invalid and temporary error invalid stations Number of faulty stations X 118 X BT X 1 number of retries 5 1 5 1 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q TR Transient processing time only when a transient request is made When there is a transient request from the master station 180 X BT When there is a transient request from the local station 40 8 X BT X number of transient transmission stations Example Using the following system configuration when the transmission rate is 10 Mbps assuming that there is no faulty station or transient transmission Station 3 Station Station Station NUMPES Station number 1 1 number 2 2 number 4 3 number 12 1 Master Local station Remote Remote Intelligent station Remote station device station device station I O station 1 occupies 1 station 2 occupies 2 stations 3 occupies 4 stations 0 8 2300 5 NI 12 gt 16 1 800 12 X 15 980 NW 11 16 2 900 3 50 1050 N 5 3 1200 8 X 100 2300 ni 12 A 12 B 3 C 11 nw 10 LS 0 8 27 16 X 4 8 16 X 9 6 5 X 30 12 X 4 8 10 X 9 6 2300 2748 8 us 2 75 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 2 For remote I O net mode LS BT 27 NI X 4 8 N X 30 ni X 4 8 ST F u s BT Constant transmission rate 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
253. memory of an intelligent device station is accessed 2 The data read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station 3 The data is stored in the device memory of the PLC CPU and the devices specified with the RIRD instruction are turned on Master station Intelligent device station PLC CPU Master module Device memory Buffer memory 3 Receive buffer Before performing data communication using transient transmission the sizes of the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master station For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers see Section 6 2 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 5 Parameter setting with GX Developer Using GX Developer makes the setting of the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters easier The data link is automatically started if GX Developer is used to set the parameters Using GX Developer to set the parameters has the following advantages t is not necessary to write a program for setting the parameters t is possible to perform automatic refresh in the system In case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the dedicated instruction RLPASET the module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the No
254. ment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and wa
255. n Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from the master station Program to generate send data to the master station 11 11 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 5 Performing the Data Link Turn on the power to the local station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 11 5 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the local station when the data link is being performed normally 1 LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11 The data link is being performed g normally RUN e L RUN Controlling data link MST S MST SD RD j Receiving data Sending data ERR LERR o 2 LED display of the local station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status On o ot Module is normal QJ61BT11 The data link is being performed TP a normally RUN e L RUN lt MST O O SMST SD RD 4 34 Receiving data Sending data L Em LERR 11 12 11 12 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 5 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence
256. n X ES 8 Device memory Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Y E E Device init Online Remote net mode All connectcount Remote 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register R wr D1000 Remote registefiwWw 02000 Special relay SB SBO Special register SW swo Retry count 3 Automatic reconnction station count 1 Wait master station No PLC down select Stop i Scan mode setting Asynchronous X X v Delay infomation settings 0 Station information settings Station information Remote device station initial initial setting Interrupt settings Indispensable settings setting Alreadyset Setifitismeeded Already set gt Setup item details Acknowledge XY assignment Clear 1 End setup Cancel Ready Q06H Host station NUM 11 5 11 5 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 Setting the Local Station Parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the local station 11 3 1 Setting the network parameters of the local station 1 Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Hold CClear station setting Default Clear Operational setting Number of Occ
257. n can also be received Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Master station Address Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Address 2E0 RWw 0 10s For station 2 1 1 1 For station number 1 2 2 RWw 2 1E2 number1 2 mwr38 RWw3 1 2 4 RWw 4 1 4 For station 2 5 ______ RWw 5 1E5 For station number 2 2E6u RWw 6 1 6 number2 2 7 5 MEN RWw7 1 7 2 8 RWw 8 1 8 For station 2E9 S 7777 For station number 3 2 i RWw A 1EA number3 2 1 1 RWwB 1 2 RWw C 1 For station 2 RWD 1EDu For station number4 pEE i RWw E 1 number 4 2 lr RWwF si 1 2 0 RWw 10 1 Forstaton 2 1 ______RWwitt For station number 5 2 2 i RWw 12 1F24 5 2 RWw1i3 TF to to to 3DC RWw FC 2DC For station 3DD RWwFD 2DDu For station number 64 3DEu RWw FE 2 number 64 3DFu RWwFF 2DF 8 12 8 12 8 PROGRAMMING Buffer memory number address 2 0 to 2E3H 2 4 to 2E7H 2 8 to 2 4 2 2 2 0 to 2F3H 6 2F4u to 2 7 2F8H to 2FBH 8 2 to 2FFH 9
258. n number 7 Station number 8 Station number 9 Station number i 1 Remote 2 Remote device station 3 Standby master station 4 Intelligent 5 Local station station device station Data link faulty station If this station is set as a reserved station it will not be treated as a faulty station Specify unoccupied station numbers as reserved stations An unoccupied station number will be treated as a data link faulty station can be verified with link special registers SW0080 to SW0083 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 7 2 Transmission rate and mode settings Transmission rate and mode settings are specified with the transmission rate mode setting switch For details on the transmission rate mode setting switch see Section 7 3 The transmission rate that can be set varies depending on the total distance For more details see Section 3 1 1 Use the same transmission rate for the master station remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station If the setting for even one of the stations is different data link cannot be established properly 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 8 Checking the Connection Status Line Test After connecting all of the modules with CC Link dedicated cables verify that they are correctly connected and that data linking can be performed with remote st
259. n to station cable length In contrast the conventional modules are defined as Version 1 00 See Section 3 1 2 for the maximum overall cable distance of Version 1 10 In order to make the station to station cable length uniformly 20 cm or more the following conditions are required 1 All the modules that make up the CC Link system must be of Version 1 10 2 All the data link cables must be CC Link dedicated cables conforming to Version 1 10 The specifications for Version 1 00 should be used for the maximum cable overall distance and station to station cable length if a system contains modules and cables of both Version 1 00 and Version 1 10 See Section 3 1 1 for the maximum overall cable distance and station to station cable length of Version 1 00 1 How to check if the module is of Version 1 10 Modules of Version 1 10 have the logo CC Link on the rating plate CC Link MELSEC G MITSUBISHI MODEL SERIAL 02092 0000000000 B LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IN JAPAN 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 6 About use of the QJ61BT11 with the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU Here use of the QJ61BT11 with the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU is explained 1 Number of QJ61BT11 that can be installed when the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU is used See item 2 2 1 concerning the number of QJ61BT11 that can be installed when the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU is used Limitations when using the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU a Usethe QJ61
260. n2 D n3 Set data The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent Between 0 and parameter setting value Binary 16 bits device station specified by the master station or the random access buffer Within the range of the D Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored M Device specified device Number of points to read 0 to 4096 Binary 16 bits 1 The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer 2 No processing will be performed when set to App 23 App 23 APPENDIX 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RIFR instruction Master station DN PLC CPU Master module Command Communication G RIFR commences when conditions are met Specified station Buffer memory MELSEC Q Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer Device memory Automatic update buffer memory 1 Accesses the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 of the master module specified by Un 2 Stores the data read after the device specified by D b The RIFR instruction reads data when it is executed However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station c The maximum points that can be read by the RIFR instruction are 4096 d The
261. nce of the CC Link system cannot be guaranteed If you have any questions regarding the CC Link dedicated cable or if you wish to see its specifications see the CC Link Partner Association homepage http www cc link org 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of QJ61BT1 1 dividing them into four sections Basic Functions Functions for Improving System Reliability Handy Functions and Transient Transmission Functions 4 1 Function List 1 Table 4 1 lists the basic functions Table 4 1 List of the basic functions Description Reference section Communication with remote I O d tati Performs on off data communication with remote station Section 4 2 1 station Communication with remote device Performs on off data and numeric data communication with Section 4 2 2 ection 4 2 station remote device station eats Performs on off data and numeric data communication with local Communication with local station iai Section 4 2 3 station Communication with intelligent Performs communication with intelligent device station cyclic ection 4 2 device station transmission and transient transmission Parameter setting with GX Sets the network parameter automatic refresh parameter with Sabado ection 4 2 Developer the GX Developer Parameter setting with dedicated Sets the network parameter with the RLPASET instruction Section 4 2 6 2 Tab
262. nction of the module If the screws are loose it may cause fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Dec 1999 SH NA 080016 A Oct 2000 SH NA 080016 B Add the contents of the function version B Change the name from MELSECNET 10H to MELSECNET H Added model type Section 2 2 3 Addition Section 1 3 Section 2 2 4 Section 4 4 12 Appendix 5 Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 Section 2 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 1 4 4 3 4 4 8 Section 5 1 5 3 1 Section 6 3 1 6 3 3 Section 7 3 Section 8 4 1 8 4 2 Section 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 3 Section 11 4 Section 13 1 13 4 Appendix 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 6 Index Jun 2001 SH NA 080016 C Standardize the name from software package GPP function to Product name GX Developer Addition Section 2 2 6 Section 4 2 5 4 2 6 Section 6 1 3 6 4 Appendix 2 7
263. nding module when the power is ON Station number of the standby master station specified with a parameter 0000 Standby master station is not specified 5 SO OI 9 SW0059 transmission rate setting 10 SW0060 mode setting status 13 20 13 20 APPENDIX MELSEC Q APPENDIX Appendix 1 External Dimensions Diagram This section describes the external dimensions of the QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 RUN 90 3 54 27 4 1 08 Terminal block diagram with the cover open Unit mm inch App 1 App 1 App APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 Dedicated Instruction List Transient transmission can be performed for the local stations and intelligent device stations using dedicated instructions The following table lists the dedicated instructions that can be used for each of these stations Reads data from the buffer memory or the 2 Appendix 2 1 Master station PLC CPU device of the specified station Local station Writes data into the buffer memory or the PLC RIWT m Appendix 2 2 CPU device of the specified station Reads data from the buffer memory of the Appendix 2 1 specified station Writes data into the buffer memory of the RIWT N Appendix 2 2 specified station Automatically performs handshaking with the specified station and reads data from t
264. ng range Data type Un Start I O number of the module to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored Device name specified device S2 Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the stored specified device D2 Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the Bit reading D2 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion specified device x The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data Setting range Setby Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 Access code Buffer memor Number of points x2 S1 nRa Specify the read data count in word units 1 to 480 User App 13 App 13 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the intelligent device station from which data will be read 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter
265. nk can be performed normally It is also possible when QJ61BT11 is mounted in the remote I O station 1 Host monitoring This function monitors the items such as the data link status of the host the station to which peripheral devices are connected a Operating procedure Click Diagnostics and then CC Link diagnostics Set the host monitor applicable module with Unit No or I O address under the Unit setting and click Monitor start CC Link diagnostics xi r Line monitor Host station Link scan time P ms 1 0 address Host station Master station Data link status linking ini Action status Normal Minimum mo Switching status Master station Curent ms p Network test 3 Data link start Using loop 0 Line status Data link stop CH 1 Line status Loop type Twist Single Bus Monitoring other station PESE Monitor stop Acquire the setting information Result eut Close After acquiring setting information by tuming device Y n amp on with Device Test the acquired information can be set as EEPROM Parameters b Monitoring items 1 Host station Indicates whether the station that is being monitored is the master station a local station or the standby master station For a local station the station number is also displayed 2 Data link status Displays the data link s
266. nput receiving data Master station Remote I O station station number 1 Remote device station station number 2 Local station station number 3 The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas Local station station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote register RWr Sacer a 1 l l mns Remote input RX Remote output RY Station number 1 je Input Station number 1 Station number 2p 4 Remote input RX Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote output RY Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 L S FL aman Station number 2 Station number 3 k Station number 3 Station number 4 K Station number 4 Remote register Remote register RWw RWr Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 x Staton numbers Station number 4 Station number 4 E Remote register RWw Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote output RY Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote input RX Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station
267. ns Local station PLC CPU RXOOF to RX000 RYOOF to RY000 Y100F to v1000 RXO1F to RX010 RYO1F to RYO10 Y101F to Y1010 RXO2F to RX020 2 to RYO20 Y102F to Y1020 to RX030 RYOSF to RY030 Y108F to Y1030 RXO4F to RX040 RYO4F to RYO40 Y104F to Y1040 RXO5F to RX050 RYOSF to RY050 Y105F to Y1050 RXO6F to RX060 RYOGF to RYO60 Y106F to Y1060 X1070 to x1070 RXO7F to RX070 RYO7F to RYO70 RXOOF to RX000 to Y1070 RYOOF to RYOOO X100F to X1000 RYO1F to RYO10 RXO1F to RX010 X101F to X1010 2 to RYO20 RXO2F to RX020 X102F to X1020 RYO3F to RY030 to RX030 X103F to X1030 RYO4F to RY040 RXO4F to RX040 X104F to X1040 to RYO50 RXO5F to RX050 X105F to X1050 RYO6F to RY060 RXO6F to RX060 X106F to X1060 1070 to v1070 RYO7F to RYO70 RX07F to RX070 L X107D to X1070 11 9 11 9 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Master station Local station Local station PLC CPU Master station PLC CPU ewjol lsxzjioio rj ojojol w o sJ o 5
268. nt device stations Remote net 4 52 4 4 5 Speeding up the response from remote I O stations Remote I O net mode 4 53 4 4 6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future Reserved station function a nns 4 54 4 4 7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection Error invalid station setting 4 55 4 4 8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan Scan synchronous function 4 56 4 4 9 Replacing modules without error detection Temporary error invalid station setting function 4 60 4 4 10 Checking operations for each local station Data link 4 61 4 4 11 Station number overlap checking function cecceceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeaecaeeeesaesaeseeseaesansaeseeeeateaes 4 62 4 4 12 Multiple PLC System Support nennen nennen trennen treten nnns 4 63 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions 4 64 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission Dedicated instructions 4 64 5 1 Link SCan inr eae Ee sd eai Ns E oer No Ra RE rr RR 5 1 5 2 Transmission Delay Time euess
269. nt transmission such as the AJ65BT R2 including local stations Backup station for data link control when the link to the master station is disconnected due to a PLC CPU or power supply problem Generic term for QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 Generic term for QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as master stations Generic term for QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as local stations Generic term for AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65SBTB1 16D AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI and A852GOT Module that can perform transient transmission such as the AJ65BT R2 including Remote station Intelligent device station Standby master station Master local module Master module Local module Remote module Intelligent device module local module Dedicated mode for sending and receiving data to and from the remote I O station at Remote I O net mode f high speed Mode that can communicate with all stations used for CC Link remote I O station Remote net mode remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Link special relay for CC Link SB Bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status of the master station local station Expressed as SB for convenience Link special register for CC Link SW 16 bit unit
270. o standby master station specified Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Example Set to blank No standby master station specified Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous Set the link scan interval using Delay information settings Default value 0 Not specified Setting range 0 to 100 Unit 50 5 Example Set to 10 500 ts 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q n Setthe station data using Station information settings Default value Remote I O station Exclusive station 1 or no setting for reserved stations error invalid Setting range Station type No setting Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station including local station and standby master station Exclusive station count No setting Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station 2 Exclusive station 3 Exclusive station 4 Reserved invalid station select No setting Reserved station Invalid station error invalid station Intelligent buffer select word No setting Send 0 64 to 4096 Receive 0 64 to 4096 Automatic 0 128 to 4096 Example Set the station data acc
271. of boards in setting of GX Developer Network parameter Automatic refresh parameter Write to PLC Master station Remote I O station Remote device station Local station p Data link start Setting method For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction It is possible to use the RLPASET instruction to set the network parameters and start the data link Using the RLPASET instruction to set the parameters has the following advantages e t is possible to mount five or more QJ61BT11 modules see Section 2 2 1 for details about the number of CPUs that can be mounted t is possible to change the network parameter settings while the PLC CPU is running It is recommended to use GX Developer to set the parameters when the number of QJ61BT11 mounted is 4 or less Parameter setting direction Control data set RLPASET instruction RLPASET m instruction completion Refresh Write to PLC direction 2 Remote I O station Remote device station nmoun amp o0000 Data link start 1 Setting method For more details on the setting see Section 6 4 For the RLPASET instruction see Appendix 2 7 2 Precautions when using the RLPASET instruction to set the network parameters a remote I O net mode cannot be used The module operate
272. ogram Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the LED display on the corresponding Unable to receive remote input RX of a remote Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station device station performing data link Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 13 2 13 2 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Is data read from the correct address of remote input RX buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station 5 0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Is the corresponding station set as a reserved Check the paramst rs station Check the reserved station specified status Unable to receive remote input RX of a remote SW0074 to SW0077 device station Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO09B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Are there any
273. ommunication between the master station and a remote I O station using the remote I O net mode In the communication with the remote I O station the on off data of the switches and indicator lamps are communicated through remote input RX and remote output RY PLC CPU Master station Remote I O station Network Network parameters parameters Automatic refresh parameters Buffer memory 3 Krm refresh dod 2 5 4 Automatic refresh gt E EA Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system automatically starts up 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote input 2 The input status of a remote I O station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station RXoF to RX00_ XOF to X00 x i O RXIFtoRX10 f 0 0 RX2F to RX20 XOF to X00 X1F to X10 RX7FF to RX7FO 16 point module 32 point module Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the auto
274. on Datalink Station number 2 Station number 4 ata im Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 control in el Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic copper contiunication Standby master station returns to normal and comes back online gt Standby master station Standby master station prepares itself for master station system down Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Data link Station number 2 Station number 4 ata In Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby control in dd NEN NEN LL Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 11 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function This function performs the initial setting for the remote device station using the GX Developer without creating a sequence program see Section 4 4 1 12 Event issuance for the interrupt program This function issues an event when the conditions set by the GX Developer are established in order to make the PLC CPU execute the interrupt program see Section 4 4 2 13 Automatic CC Link startup By installing the QJ61BT11 the CC Link is started up and all data are refreshed by simply turning on the power without creating a sequence program However when the number of connected modules is less than 64 it is necessary to se
275. on intelligent device station when local station is operating Data link status Remote Remote Remote Remote t Remote Remote output i ist regis er regis er regis er register t RX Joutput RY t RX RY input RS output ww wp 17 RY RWw RW When data link ig stopped gue toan bd generated Continue Continue Continue Clear Continue Continue Continue by the master station PLC CPU data link continue When data link is st d due t ted Clears the receive The GX Developer areas from other Retains the When data link for data ink fault Aia Mcd the entire system is um A Undefined P Undefined Undefined stopped station is set local OFF Retains the receive from other station setting areas from other stations Clears the receive area from a remote Wh station with a ena n The GX Developer communication communication error data link fault Ren power off etc EUN y Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue remote station is set local Retains the receive station station setting area from a remote station with a communication error Clears the receive Retains the area from a remote receive area Wh Clear device station with ena f The GX Developer a communication communication error data link fault power off etc TEA y Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
276. on initial setting Procedure registration unit 1 Target station 1 xi Input format pc x Execute Operational Executional condition Dov EE Device Execute ie Device Write gt 35 L o MANN trece Sane as mevsst on Execute ps set 5 ON Execute Same as prev set RUE UH ix Execute new I B Set new Set new Set new Default End setup 10 10 10 10 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings This section explains the link special relays SB relating to the initial settings of remote device stations Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit positions of the buffer memory Example For buffer memory address 5E0H and bit 13 BEOH b13 Table 10 1 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings Availability Available X Not available Number Name Description Master Offline a Local station station Starts initial processing using the information registered during the initialization procedure registration Remote device station 580000 While SBOOOD is the refresh of the remote input output 5 0 b13 initialization procedure P
277. onous mode SM LS X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 3 SL ms 20 3 3 10 39 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n X 3 SL ms 20X1 X3 10 70 ms 2 Master station RY local station RX This indicates the time from the moment the master station CPU device turns ON OFF until the local station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3Xx2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 SL
278. ontrol ladder when the standby master station is operating Local station operating d function is used MELSEC Q Program example when standby master function master station duplex e Control start relay used when master station is operating M10 e Control start relay used when standby master station is operating M11 54402 SET M10 Control start relay when the master d station is operating SET TI Control start relay when the station master station is local station is xo xt XOF SB7B operating NO NO MO SB5A BOVE KAX1000 101000 Ke Save remote input RX and emote register RWr data to W device BMOVP D1000 11500 K16 J SB5B FM 68 gt Set the saved data to remote output RY and remote register RWr BMOVP W1500 D2000 K16 J SB5A SB5B KX HWA fet SBI Refresh change instruction request ON SB42 x RST SBI Refresh change instruction request OFF A cre M10 J SS a n o PEU EEG S A voor ementi eun a iE epu euism eS ofr te eet Control program when the standby master operation is operating local station operation ze e When forcibly switching the data link control right from the standby master station to the master station The areas enclosed by the broken and dotted lines in the program example shown in d must be modified as shown below Forced master switching
279. ording to the system configuration specified in Section 6 3 CC Link station information Unit 1 Exclusive station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word lt tation No Station type count station select Automatic Remotel O station y Exclusive station 1_ No setting zz pem 2 2 Remote device station gt Exclusive station 2 7 No seting v f 3 4 Intelligent device station Exclusive station 4 v No setting 64 64 12 4 8 Remote O station Exclusive station 1 v Reserve station v Default End setup Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 3 The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update buffer assignments First module station Intelligent device sta Send buffer First module station Intelligent device sta Receive buffer number 4 tion number 4 ion Send buffer Intelligent device sta Receive buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device stati Second module station number 9 ion First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings je MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC G
280. output RY buffer memory of other local stations 4 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters The remote input RX is used as input data in local station systems 5 The input status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Local station Station number 1 occupies 1 station PLC CPU PLC CPU Master station Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RX3F to RX30 RX5F to RX50 RX4F to RX40 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY5F to RY50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RX8F to RX80 RY8F to RY80 RY6F to RY60 The last two bits cannot be used the communication between the master and local stations 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q On off data from the master station to local stations 6 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the temote output RY buffer memory of the master station 7 The data in the remote output RY buffer memory is stored automatically for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the local station 8 The input status stored in the buffer memory remote input RX is stored in the CP
281. overlap station numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of remote Check the sequence program output RY buffer memory Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station 5 0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status
282. owledge XY assignment Clear End setup Cancel Ready 006 Host station Ovewrte NUM 10 5 10 5 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below a Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 b Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 c Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to D1000 d Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to D2000 e Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO f Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting the refresh devices for special relay SB and special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not overlap with device numbers used in the MELSECNET H network 2 Setting example A setting example is shown below i MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Z Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help lal Dem S x Qee 41 ee Progam 21 060301 Master statior 5 8 Program No of boards in 1 rj Boards Blank no setting boards Set by the sequence
283. parameters Setting Description SW1 Station type Input status of data link error station SW5 Occupied stations Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 of the Function Version A to QJ61BT11 of the Function Version B There are no precautions for changing from 6 1 of the function version A to Qj61Bt11 of the function version B App 40 App 40 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 Parameter Setting Checklist This checklist may be used to set the parameters required to configure a CC Link system Please make a copy of this checklist and use it as needed For setting details see Section 6 3 Appendix 6 1 Parameter setting checklist Parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFFO Input data hold clear Operational settings Hold clear Default Clear Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Online Remote net mode Online Remote I O net mode Offline Online Remote I O net mode Offline Default Online Remote net mode All connect count LA modules Default 64 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Remote register RWw De
284. pecifications not listed below see Section 3 1 500 m Indicates the length of the cable between terminal Maximum length of the main line aft 1640 5 resistors The length of the T branch cable branch line length is not included Maximum length of the branch line 8 m 26 25 ft Indicates the overall cable length per branch Overall branch line length 50 m 164 05 ft 200 m 656 2 pt Indicates the overall length of the entire branch cable Maximum number of connected The total number of connected stations depends on the 6 stations per branch a stations on the branch line CC Link specifications The CC Link dedicated high performance cable CC Link dedicated cable cannot be used example FANC SBH Connection cable Example FANC SB CSFV SLAB Cables of different manufacturers cannot be used 100ZCLK SB 20AWGX3C together See the cable catalog for details on the manufacturers Terminal resistor 1100 45 1 2W x 4 Use a commercially available terminal resistor of connection method Connect between DA and DG DB and DG both ends 110 Q 5 and 1 2 W resistance Connection 110 and 130 Q resistors that are supplied with the Only when H100l master local modules cannot be used A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is used as the master station When the QJ61BT11 is used as the master station connect the 110 Q resistor that is supplied with the module For the connection method see Section 7 5
285. point 0 8 A common 8 points common one touch connector type 2 line transistor output 16 point module sink AJ65VBTCU2 16T 12 24 V DC 0 1 A point 1 6 A common 16 points common one touch connector type module Input 1 line DC input 16 point positive common AJ65SBTB1 32DT 24 V DC 7 mA 32 points common Output 1 line transistor output 16 point sink 24 V DC 0 5 A point 32 points common module Input 1 line DC input 16 points positive common AJ65SBTC1 32DT 24 V DC 5 mA 32 points common Output 1 line transistor output 16 points sink 24 V DC 0 1 A point 32 points common module high speed response type Input 1 line DC input 16 points positive common AJ65SBTC1 32DT1 24 V DC 5 mA 32 points common Output 1 line transistor output 16 points sink AJ65SBTB2N 16R AJ65SBTB2N 8S AJ65SBTB2N 16S Compact type pads 24 V DC 0 1 A point 32 points common 3 Remote I O remote I O 1 station mole module FCN connector type station Input 1 line DC input 16 point positive common negative common shared AJ65SBTCF1 32DT 24 V DC 5 mA 16 points common Output 1 line transistor output 16 point sink 12 24 V DC 0 1 A point 16 points common module Input 2 3 4 line DC input 8 points positive common AJ65SBTC4 16DT 24 V DC 5 mA 16 points common Output 2 3 4 line transistor output 8 points sink DC 0 5 A point 16 points common odule waterproof type Waterproof 4 line DC in
286. program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 When X20 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station turns on 2 When X21 of the local station is turned on Y40 of the master station turns on Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QJe1BT11 QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QJe1BT11 QX41 QY41P QX41 T Terminal resistor 11 13 11 13 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS The communication method between the master station and intelligent device stations is different for each intelligent device station For more details on the communication between the master station and intelligent device stations see the manual for each intelligent device station 12 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q This chapter describes the details of the problems that may occur in the CC Link System and lists the check items and procedures for each of the possible problems 13 1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence The following lists the details of the check items and procedures for each problem occurrence Description of problem Check item Check
287. ption by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 9 Replacing modules without error detection Temporary error invalid station setting function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station that are specified with the GX Developer from being treated as data link faulty stations while online It allows the replacement of modules while online without error detection 1 Input output status at temporary error invalid station setting All the cyclic transmission data of the stations set as temporary error invalid stations is refreshed However when a station set as a temporary error invalid station becomes faulty the input is retained and the output switches off 2 Setting method Set the Diagnostics CC Link diagnostics Monitoring other station Invalid station if temporary error using the GX Developer Place the cursor at the station to be set as a temporary error invalid station and click Setting Cancel Line monitor Other station x Ignore an error for the present r Invalid station if temporary error Setting Cancel For current cursor station Monitor stop Close 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 10 Checking operations for each local station Data link stop restart This func
288. put 16 point module 100 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 0 6 A point 4 8 A common 16 points common ransistor output 32 point module sink V DC 0 5 A point 4 8 A common 32 points common ransistor output 32 point module sink VDC 0 5 A point 4 8 A common 32 points common Power leakage at OFF Low power type 1 line transistor output 32 point module sink 12 24 V DC 0 1 A point 32 points common ransistor output 32 point module sink FCN connector type V DC 0 1 A point 32 points common 2 line transistor output 8 point module sink V DC 0 5 A point 2 4 A common 8 points common ransistor output 16 point module sink Remote I O station e 12 24 V DC 0 5 A point 3 6 A common 16 points common 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q Table 2 1 Equipment list 3 4 Number of occupied y Product name Model name Description Station type stations 2 line relay output 8 point module A BTB2N 8R J639 3 24 V DC 240 V AC 2 A point 4 A common 8 points common 2 line relay output 16 point module 24 V DC 240 V AC 2 A point 8 A common 16 points common 2 line triac output 8 point module 100 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 0 6 A point 2 4 A common 8 points common 2 line triac output 16 point module 100 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 0 6 A point 4 8 A common 16 points common 2 line transistor output 8 point module sink AJ65VBTCU2 8T 12 24 V DC 0 1 A
289. put 8 point positive common 24 V DC 5 mA 16 points common Output Waterproof 4 line transistor output 8 point sink DC 0 5 A point 16 points common odule 1 line DC input 8 point positive common AJ65SBTB1 16DT DC 7 mA 16 points common Output 1 line transistor output 8 point sink DC 0 5 A point 16 points common odule 1 line DC input 8 point positive common AJ65SBTB1 16DT1 DC 5 mA 16 points common AJ65SBTW4 16DT Output 1 line transistor output 8 point sink DC 0 5 A point 16 points common odule 1 line DC input 16 point positive common AJ65SBTB1 32DT1 DC 5 mA 32 points common Output 1 line transistor output 16 point sink 24 V DC 0 5 A point 32 points common 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q Table 2 1 Equipment list 4 4 EV Number of occupied Product name Model name Description stations Station type module Input 3 line DC input 4 point positive common AJ65SBTB32 8DT 24 V DC 7 mA 8 points common Output 2 line transistor output 4 point sink 24 V DC 0 5 A point 8 points common Remote I O 1 station VO module station Input 3 line DC input 8 point positive common AJ65SBTB32 16DT 24 V DC 7 mA 16 points common Output 2 line transistor output 8 point sink 24 V DC 0 5 A point 16 points common 4 channel input analog digital AJ65SBT 64AD Analog input 10 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA converter module Digital output 4000 to 4000 0 to 4000 Compact typ
290. quest cancel request is requested All stations were in data link error status when one of the following requests was made SB0000 data link restart e SB0002 data link stop the station number of the The station number of the slave station is slave station within the range outside of the range between 1 and 64 between 1 and 64 An error was detected in a remote station intelligent device station or standby master station when a line test was performed Request again after the data link becomes normal The station number of the connected module was duplicated including occupied stations However this excludes the duplicate head station number Check the module station number 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Loading parameter compatibility error B30B Loading parameter The contents of the installation status compatibility error and network parameters do not match Standby master station specification error B30D Initial status Temporary error invalid station specification error Forced master station switching error Network startup setting mode error B381 B383 Station number setting error B384 parameter Total number of stations error B385 parameter Number of occupied stations setting error parameter UJ Q B387 Use prohibited area write error B388 B389 Use prohibited area write error Remote device station setting B38B error parameter 13 11
291. r station until a response from the local station is received Expression Maximum value a RIRD instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1x 1 067 SL ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant age 28s jog ires 1 SL 1 Local station sequence program scan time 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 X 12 3 X 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms b RIWT instruction OT LS X BC write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 SL ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant qe a SL x1 Local station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC write point
292. r PLC parameter program to the PLC CPU Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from RESET to Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from RESET to Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON Turn the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU to RUN Check operation using the LED display master station When data link is normal L RUN LED is lit When the data link is faulty L ERR LED is lit Check the connection status of each module line test see Section 7 8 Check operation using the CC Link diagnosis see Section 13 4 Register the control program in the PLC CPU Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from RESET to Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON 7 System operation End 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 2 Installation The following section explains the precautions when handling the master and local modules from the time they are unpacked until they are installed For more details on the module installation see the user s manual for the PLC CPU used 7 2 1 Handling precautions 1 Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Do not remove the PCB of each module from its case This may cause a failure in the module 3 Be careful not to let foreign objects such as wire burrs enter the module during wiring In the event any foreign object enters remove it immediately 4 Th
293. ram memory PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction Parameter area Network parameter 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 2 Parameter Setting Items Table 6 1 lists the items to be stored in the master station parameter memory Table 6 1 Parameter setting items 1 2 Setting item Sets the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that are connected to the master station Number of connected including reserved stations modules Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Sets the number of retries when a communication error occurs Number of retries Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Sets the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that can be returned to system operation Number of automatic by a single link scan Section 4 3 2 return modules Default value 1 module Setting Specifies the station number of the standby master station Standby master M SHE Default value Blank no standby master station specified Section 4 3 5 station specification 1 x Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Specifies the data link status when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Operation specification Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Section 4 3 3
294. ransmission destination and source Check ihe transmissign B782 aor stations were the same when other destination station number or station connection was specified change to host connection An error occurred in the transient storage B783 Transient storage buffer error buffer when a transient transmission of greater than 1 k was being performed A instruction type that does exist was 801 Instruction type setting error se Set the correct instruction type An access code that does not exist was B803 Data poine Sior The number of data points were out of Set the number of data points P range to within 1 to 960 bytes Review the attribute definition Attribute definition error The attribute definition was invalid Check the designation of the Transient transmission Alternatively transient transmission was target station number as well unsupported station performed even though the target station as the function version and specification error does not support transient transmission software version of the target local station Set the range to within 1 to 100 Data points error The number of data was out of range when writing and 1 to 160 when reading Set the address to a multiple of 16 when accessing the bit device The specified combination addresses Set so that the number of B80D Setting range error and points exceeded the valid processing points does not processing range exceed the device range er
295. register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to D2000 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting the special relay SB and special register SW refresh devices to SB and SW respectively specify so they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the MELSECNET H network 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 3 Local station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual je MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 1515 Z Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help 1 xj ojele S sspe u ese alel le Program z refr la 20 E Fa eal r 060301
296. rence 5 25 7 7 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 1106 20 6 1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup sse 6 1 6 1 1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter 6 1 6 1 2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer 6 2 6 1 3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction 6 2 6 2 Parameter Setting 6 3 6 3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer ccccccceceeceeeeeeeceeeeseeeesaeceeseaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaeeeseaeeaaes 6 5 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings ssssssseeneeneenenennee nennen 6 5 6 3 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings sseenene 6 10 6 3 3 Local station network parameter 6 12 6 3 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 6 14 6 4 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction sene 6 16 7 1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link nennen enne 7 1 Te T ea 7 3 7 2 1
297. rforms data linking without synchronizing with the sequence program 3 Setting method Set the scan synchronous function in Scan mode setting of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 3 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Data flows in synchronous and asynchronous modes The data flows in both the synchronous and asynchronous modes are explained using examples of communications between the master station and remote I O stations a Data flow in the asynchronous mode Sequence scan Remote input RX i LLLLLI LLI Link scan HHHH FTH Response time of the first station _ Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station Responses from remote H H H H H H I O stations i Pd p p Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 LOO i l Delay time due to response delay of remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Data flow in the synchronous mode 1 Sequence scan gt Link scan PLC CPU Sequence scan H H H Remote input RX 7 7 1 Aa Aa i Ein sean 1 HHHH HHHH HHHH Response time of the first station
298. rmation setting error parameter Set a value within the range Number of occupied stations B398 from 1 to 4 setting error parameter Standby master station specification error loading status Change the parameter after all Parameter change was executed during transient requests are transient request completed or before any are requested A response from the requested station Set a longer watchdog time If B404 Response error was not returned within the watchdog an error persists check the time period requested module and cables Transient applicable station A transient request was made to a Set the corresponding station to B405 GOL remote I O station or a remote device a local station or an intelligent station device station The setting of the interlock signal storage Change the setting of the 9 instruction is outside the setting range to within the setting range 13 12 13 12 Parameter change error 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 4 5 Detectabilit Error oe Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action hexadecimal Master station Local station The RLPASET instruction was executed Check that the self station type Execution station type error on a station other than the master has been set to the master station station Check the contents of the Request type error An unsupported request was received as well as
299. rmed using the GX Developer for registration to the PLC CPU Settings such as A D conversion enable disable and Averaging processing specification can be performed easily with the AJ65BT 64AD For an example of an initialization procedure using the GX Developer see Section 10 3 1 Initialization procedure setting method The initial settings are performed using the Remote device station initial in the network parameters A maximum of 16 stations can be set When 17 or more remote device stations are connected perform the initial settings for the 17th and subsequent stations using the sequence program a In Target set the station number of a module for which the initial settings are to be performed Setting range 1 to 64 Remote device station initial setting Target station number setting Uniti eR 3 2 Regstpcedue 3 Regist procedure 3 JjhRegstpecedue 11 Regist procedure oq Regstprocedue 13 Redist procedure 7 Registproceduref 15 east procedure e Resist procedure 16 Recist procedure End setup b Setthe initialization procedure in Regist procedure 1 Input format Set the data input format for Write data in details of execution Setting range DEC HEX Default DEC 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Execute Flag Set whether or not to execute the specified initializat
300. ror specified capacity A transient transmission was executed B815 Module mode setting error when the target station was set to the I O Set to the remote net mode mode Wait a while and then retransmit The address was not a multiple of 16 Address definition error when the bit device was accessed 18 13 13 13 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 5 5 etaed Error details Cause of error occurrence details Detectability Master station Local station Corrective action Them ing of the rem ontrol IE B823 Remote control mode error d ode Selinger ihe ferte Check the mode specification EE SWINE E was incorrect Transient request error Communication buffer size setting error Model illegal Model illegal BA19 Corresponding station error BBC2 Station number setting error BBC5 Master station overlapping error BD85 Transient rt rl BFFB ansient request overload error Hardware error detection A transient request was issued to a station that has not secured a communication buffer area The communication buffer size of the corresponding station was out of range when a dedicated instruction was executed The remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode has been set to the master station of the QJ61BT11 The remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode has been set to the master station of the QJ61BT11 The corresponding station that is being tested stopped commun
301. rs RLPASET instruction Control data 303 M 212 kK hiv 0 00 Clear complete status piv 9 01 Slave station setting data send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Valid AS Tuos 3 02 Number of connected modules involved in communication 3 Ss Tuow 3 03 Number of retries 3 times E 1 04 Number of automatic return modules 1 module s 0 05 Operation specification when CPU is down Stop Tuov 0 08 Scan mode specification Asynchronous 0 07 Delay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M303 240 MOV H2101 10 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 MOV H102 11 Second Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 2 MOW H103 12 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data station number 3 256 H64 70 First station number 1 local station Send buffer 644 nov H64 71 First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 644 72 First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer Ou Parameter registration data link startup W303 E p GP RL PASET UD D100 D110 0150 0160 170 M304 Dedicated instruction Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M304 291 KS M303 Turn the parameter setting instruction off M305 SET SB3 Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPA
302. s 16 72 1 x 1 13 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 72 1 x 1 13 0 5 5 12 1 1 13 66 15 66 2 ms 2 Local station gt master station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the local station until a response from the master station is received Expression Maximum value a RIRD instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 72 1 x 1 13 SM ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant SS Ego a SM Master station sequence program scan time 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link 1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 72 xix 1 13 ms 0 5 5 12 20 16 72 1 x 1 13 0 5 5 12 1 1 13 66 15 66 2 ms b RIWT instruction OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 x 1 067 SM ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant me sme SM Master station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link 1 Round up below the decimal point 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Example W
303. s SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SMy value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 1 1 5 21 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station response time ms 20 3 2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 2 1 5 41 5 ms 2 Master station remote device station This indicate
304. s 1 type S2 0 1 to 64 BIN setting Setting for 1 Ip 64 Setting of the number of occupied slave stations to modules S2 63 Number of occupied Setting slave stations Station 1 Station 2 Station 3 Station 4 User Setting of the type of slave station Type of slave station Setting Remote I O station Remote device station Local station Intelligent device station 2 Perform the settings for as many connected modules involved in communication as has been specified by the control data Reserved station specification data Set data Setting range Setby Specify reserved stations x 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 614 b13 012 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 10 4 3 2 1 Serine 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 TUM modules 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The default parameter setting is No reserved station specification for all stations x3 Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data x4 Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station local station or intelligent device station that occupies 2 or more stations App 31 App 31 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Error invalid station specification data Set data Setting range Setby Specify the error inva
305. s in remote net mode b If it is necessary to change the network parameters while the PLC CPU is running and the data link is being performed the data link should be stopped once using SB0002 data link stop 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q It is necessary to set I O assignments for modules whose network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction In addition do not use GX Developer to set the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters for modules whose network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction If the RLPASET instruction is used to set network parameters for modules whose network parameters and automatic refresh parameters have been set by GX Developer the RLPASET instruction will complete with an error and the network parameter settings performed by the RLPASET instruction become invalid If the switch setting of an intelligent functional module for which an I O assignment is set has not been performed or is wrong the RLPASET instruction completes with an error However the QJ61BT11 with the smallest head I O number seen from the PLC CPU starts CC Link automatically Do not use GX Developer for setting the network parameters if the network parameters of all the modules are set by the RLPASET instruction Change the No of boards in setting to blank if the network parameters have been already set by GX Developer Moreover in case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set by
306. s performed with parameters set using GX Developer or the dedicated instruction Check ON OFF of Forced master switching SBOO0C Use the RLPASET instruction according to the procedure below 1 Clear the settings of the network parameters and refresh parameters of the target module using GX Developer Set the type of I O assignment setting in GX Developer to intelli Set switch 4 of the intelligent function module switch setting in GX Developer to 0100 4 Turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU 3 Station number switch setting The station number switch was outside of Set the station number switch error the setting range within the setting range The baud rate setting was outside of the Set the baud rate setting within Bad tate setting error setting range the setting range Set within the range of 1 to station information parameters was set to 40 other than 1 to 40 The total number of occupied stations set with the station information parameter exceeded 64 The number of all occupied stations in the station information parameter was set to 0 Write operation was performed to a use prohibited area not used in the buffer memory Set a parameter value of 64 or less Set the occupied station number to a value between 1 and 4 Do not write to any of the use prohibited areas not used in the buffer memory The station
307. s the maximum number of data items that can be written Specify the buffer memory capacity of the local station or the intelligent device station Also specify the send buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter 3 When the counterpart PLC CPU is other than QCPU mode QCPU A mode QnACPU AnUCPU and writes the PLC CPU device the setting range will be 1 to 10 words 1 Buffer memory in the CC Link Buffer Memory contents Buffer in the intelligent device station Buffers in master station and local Remote output 22H station Remote register 24H Link special relay Link special register gan O 2 Device memory in the PLC CPU Device contents Name W wod Unit Access code Attribute code or eem Output relay Y Hexadedmal _ 02 Becma Decima 89 jHexdecima 23 Decimal 09 Decimal om NR NN smer eonan ST O Beim f Retentive imer ST 8 amp Retentive timer guum value Lo poems s Decimal t Decimal 12H om O eoma im E p Ooo Counter contact Counter coil Counter present value C Dataregister D um 04 O Hexadecimal 24 Decimal Link register File register om om O pesi 6 Special ink register sw Hexadecimal
308. s the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON OFF until the remote device station output turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing t
309. scan where the RIWT instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIWT instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIWT instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program Execution completion of ON the RIWT E M RIWT instruction or ASAA at completion Completion device fjr MEE S i completion D NE E Status display device OFF Normal completion 1 scan d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIWT instruction is 8 steps f The send buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 4 Operation error In the following cases an operation error occurs the
310. shed by the master local station SB Points of the link special relay SB refreshed by the master local station SW Points of the link special register SW refreshed by the master local station aE File register ZR transfer time on memory card only when file register is used KM1 Constant 1 Master station Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 2 Local station Q00JCPU Q00CPU QO1CPU QO2CPU 0 63 Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q i Ww Constant When QJ61BT11 is mounted on main base unit ime Jess 091 QO2CPU 0 48 0 32 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 2 When QJ61BT11 is mounted on extension base unit uoces KM2 KM3 x10 ox 103 QO0JCPU QocPU tic orcpu 185 Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 0 98 0 06 Example When the PLC CPU type is the QO6HCPU the QJ61BT11 is mounted on the main base and used as the master station and 2048 points of RX 2048 points of RY 256 points of RWw 256 points of RWr 512 points of SB and 512 points of SW are refreshed besides the file register 1 KM2 X HRX RY SB RWw X 16 RWr X 16 SW X 16 16 0 16 0 00043 X 2048 2048 512 256 16 256 X 16 512 X 16 16 0 16 0 00043 X 2048 2048 512 4096 4096 8192 16 0 16 0 00043 X 20992 16 0 7
311. sly executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIRCV instruction is 10 steps f The receive buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 2 Operation error In the following cases an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO 0112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range App 16 App 16 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Program example When M1 is turned ON this program reads 11 word data to D40 and succeeding addresses from buffer memory address 400 of the intelligent device station number 63 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X YOO to X Y1F The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows request device RY2 completion device RX2 error code storage device RWr2 and completion mode 1 Also set the link special register SW refresh device to SWO Mt SW83 E MOV D11 MV H Di2 MOV H400 D13 D14 MOV H2 D15 MOV H202 D16 MV D17 GP RIRCV UO D10 D40 D15 M20 RST Mt M2
312. ssssisse esses sesesetn entente etna 5 4 5 2 1 Master station remote I O station sss nennen nennen nnne nnns 5 4 5 2 2 Master station lt remote device station 2 222 5 6 5 2 3 Master station lt local 5 11 5 2 4 Master station lt intelligent device station sssseneeneeeenenn enn 5 16 5 3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions seseeeeeeeeeneenne nennen 5 17 5 3 1 Master station lt local station esssssssssssssssssssses eene nnne nennt rnnt nnns 5 17 5 3 2 Eocal stations local Station trt etr eee E esee vaa eee 5 20 5 3 3 Master station lt intelligent device station ssseeenenennnnenn 5 21 54 LinkRetresh sar rr or enr tar rrt ed e outre d at etr od ETUR er ISO DER 5 22 5 4 1 Master station local station 5 22 5 5 Station Status at Error Occurrence sessi 5 24 5 5 1 Status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence 5 24 5 5 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occur
313. station Station number 0 Controlling Cyclic communication Cyclic communication To the next page Cyclic communication x1 When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station the station number of the standby master station becomes 0 x2 When the master station returns to system operation as a standby master station the station number of the master station becomes the one specified in the Standby master station number in the network parameters 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Problem occurs in the standby master station Data link control by the master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Controlling Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 7 Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic cop nication Standby master station returns to normal mode and system operation Standby master station prepares itself for master station system down Standby master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Controlling Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby LA N Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication 4
314. station station number 3 Station Y102F to Y1020 2 number 2 Y103F to Y1030 Station Y104FtoY1048 Y1047to Y1040 H YOF to 08 X07 to X00 LL Y105F to Y1050 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS MELSEC Q xo XOF xi Read data link status 9 E 99 jw 580 of each station 7 Station number 1 is faulty Processing upon m occurrence of faulty 4 9 te i Station number 2 is faulty station 2 11 52 Station number 3 is faulty S Station number 1 is 13 CALL F9 performing the data link Confirmation of data link MI Station number 2 is status 3 18 m F20 performing the data link 2 Station number 3 is C Pao performing the data link P 22 FEND P10 X1000 140 Control program for 26 RET station number 1 2 20 X20 3 27 Y1020 f Control program lt ontro program for 30 RET Station number 2 2 P30 x2 31 31048 X1040 4 4 y Control program for station number 3 36 RET 2 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 4 Performing the Data Link Turn on the power to the remote I O stations first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 9 4 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote I
315. station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 2 10 36 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM Xn LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn LS X 2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms 5 2 4 Master station intelligent device station The transmission delay time between the master station and an intelligent device station varies by the type of intelligent device station used See the User s Manual for the intelligent device module to be used 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions This indicates the dedicated instruction processing time the time from the moment an instruction is issued until a response is received 5 3 1 Master station lt local station 1 Master station local station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the maste
316. station type Intelligent Local station intelligent device station and standby master station Remote station Device Remote device station 5 Occupied number Displays the number of occupied stations 6 Status Displays the link status of the module 7 Transient error Displays whether or not an error occurred during transient transmission x Error occurred t Error did not occur When making temporary error invalid station setting do not perform write to buffer memory addresses 5E0n 603H to 607 13 16 13 16 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Line test Checks the operating status of the connected remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station Stations that are operating normally are displayed in blue and faulty stations are displayed in red a Operating procedure Click Diagnostics and select Loop test under CC Link diagnostics Loop test x All station monitor Normal B r Loop test 1 Station no All station 1 64 Selected station Close 1 When checking the communication status of all stations Select All Stations 1 station No and click Test execute Since the test is performed on all 64 stations the stations that are not connected will be displayed as faulty stations 2 When checking the communication status of sp
317. ster station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 a Mis Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Data B control in progress LA Cyclic communication Cyclic communication To the next page 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Master station returns to normal and comes back online Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down Master station Standby master station Station number 0 1 Station number 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Standby Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Pata control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Problem occurrence in the standby master station Data link control by the master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device stati
318. t lt lt m ixi um FF ERA o o Use prohibited E 1 t t gt Ht lt gt 4 n gt o x x lt lt olo lt ils F m x lt 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q IMPORTANT The use prohibited output signals shown in Table 8 1 are accessed by the system and cannot be accessed by the user In the event these signals are used turned on off by the user normal operations cannot be guaranteed In the A QnA series data link startup was performed by setting the Yn6 Data Link Startup Request initiated by a buffer memory parameter and Yn8 Data link Startup Request initiated by an E PROM parameter Do not use Yn6 and Yn8 for the Q series because the data link startup is automatically performed 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 2 2 Details of the I O signals The following explains the on off timings and conditions of the I O signals shown in Table 8 1 1 Module error XnO This signal indicates whether the module is normal or faulty OFF Module normal ON Module error Module error Xn0 Module ready XnF Host data link status Xn1 This signal indicates the data link status of the host station OFF Data link is stopped ON Data linking in progress Other station data link status Xn3 This signal indicates the data link status of other stations
319. t 8 1 8 2 I O Signals for the PLC CPU ssssssssssssseseesee innen 8 2 8 2 1 IO Sigrial lists rore eet ete dt et hie See a 8 2 8 2 2 Details of the l O signals 2 nne Unite penitentie 8 4 9 3 Buffer Memory vers eres er e eei nei n gie teehee E lied eee ivi E gs 8 5 8 3 1 Buffer memory list t rennen ARAE AANE ECAA 8 5 8 3 2 Buffer memory details ocarina niia iee nnns 8 7 8 4 Link Special Relays and Registers SB SW sse enne nene tnnt 8 17 8 4 1 Link special relays 8 17 9 42 Link special registers SW erede etri rnin rer net yere ERO een een nes 8 22 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS 9 1109 10 9 1 GConfiguring a Systelmb Ln S ed ue 9 1 9 1 1 Setting the master Station ir eiie o Ree UI eg e DR e rae ecu SOR ERRAT 9 2 9 1 2 Setting the remote I O stations esssssssssssssssssseeeeneeneteenne nennen nnne nennt 9 3 9 2 Setting the Master Station Parameters sse nennen trennen nnns nnn 9 4 9 2 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station sssssseene 9 4 9 2 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master
320. t stands Forced master switching by in case the standby master station becomes faulty 0 No request 1 Requested Refresh instruction Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master acknowledgement status switching has been acknowledged or not at standby master 0 Not acknowledged Switching 1 Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master Switching is complete or not 0 Not complete 1 Switching complete Indicates whether the forced master switching SBOO0C signal Forced master switching be executed or not executable status OFF Cannot be executed ON Can be executed Indicates the acknowledgement status of the standby master station when it has received a master switching request from the line OFF Not acknowledged ON Request acknowledged Indicates whether or not the switch from the standby master Master switching request station to the master station is complete complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates whether a forced master switching request has been Forced master switching acknowledged or not request acknowledgement 0 Not acknowledged 1 Instruction acknowledged 1 Link special relay added to the module having the serial No whose first five digits are 03082 or later Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching Master switching request acknowledgement 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Table 4 5 List of link special
321. t the network parameters in order to optimize the link scan time see Section 4 4 3 14 Selecting a mode according to the system The CC Link system has two types of modes remote net mode and remote I O net mode See sections 4 4 4 and 4 4 5 The differences between the two modes are listed in the table below O ed Remote net mode Remote I O net mode Remote O station Remote device station Connectable station Intelligent device station Remote I O station Local station Standby master station Max 10 Mbps Max 10 Mbps Linkscantime Faster than the remote net mode 15 Reserved station function Stations that are not actually connected stations to be connected in the future Will not be treated as faulty stations if they are specified as reserved stations see Section 4 4 6 Stations that will be connected in the future Reserved station up number 4 Local Master station Reserved station station Station number 1 Station number 3 Occupying Station number 8 Station number 10 Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station occupying 2 stations occupying 1 station EN ra d occupying 2 stations occupying 1 station 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 16 Error invalid station setting function By setting the network parameters the module that is powered off in the system configuration will not be treated as a data link faulty station by the master station
322. tations and whether or not more than one station whose station number setting is 0 exists in the system 1 Occupied station number overlap checking Checks whether or not occupied station numbers duplicate Example Local station station number 1 Station Station Station Station number of occupied stations 4 number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 Duplicate amp Remote device station station number 4 number of occupied stations 2 Station Station number 4 number 5 1 When there is an duplicate the ERR LED flashes and the duplicate status is stored in SW0098 to SWOO9B Station number overlap status 2 Evenif an overlap exists the data link continues with the remaining normally functioning stations 3 By correcting the switch setting to normal and resetting the PLC CPU of the master station the ERR LED is turned off and the data SW0098 to SWOOS9B can be cleared However if the starting station number overlaps it is excluded from the overlap checking Example Local station station number 1 number of occupied stations 4 USES S Em Station Station Station Station Station Station number 1 number 2 number number 4 number 5 number 6 Duplicate 4 5 Remote device station station number 1 number of occupied stations 2 Station Station number 1 number 2 C
323. tatus of the host 3 Action status Displays the operating status of the host 4 Switching status Displays whether the data link is controlled by the master station or standby master station 5 Using loop Displays the line in use 6 Line status Displays the line status 7 Loop type Displays the line type POINT When conducting a network test do not perform write to buffer memory address 5EOnH 13 15 13 15 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Other station monitoring This function monitors the items such as the data link status of other stations stations other than the one to which peripheral devices are connected a Operating procedure Click Diagnostics and then select Monitoring other station under CC Link diagnostics Line monitor Other station x Station Reserve Error invalidit Station type ccupied number Status Transient error 120 1 Ignore an error for the present Invalid station if temporary error Setting Cancel For current cursor station Monitor stop Close b Monitoring items 1 Station Displays the head station number of each station 2 Reserve Displays whether or not a reserved station is set x Reserved station is set Reserved station is not set 3 Error invalidity Displays whether or not an error invalid station is set x Error invalid station is set Error invalid station is not set 4 Station type Displays the
324. te 8 18 Data link restart result 8 22 Data link StOp nete 8 17 Data link stop acceptance 8 18 Data link stop complete 8 18 Data link stop 8 23 Data link 1 9 4 61 Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error 1 6 4 27 Dedicated instruction 4 64 Dedicated instruction list App 2 Delay timer information 8 24 Detailed LED display status 8 23 Details of the I O signals 8 4 Device assignment checklist App 44 Differences between the new and previous App 39 Digital analog converter module 2 9 EMC directive sse A 11 Equipment list 2 6 Error invalid station setting function 1 9 4 55 Error invalid station specified status 8 20 8 25 Event issuance for the interrupt F program rettet ees 1 8 4 47 Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure 8 19 External dimensions diagram
325. te I O station 69D Loading t Intelligent device station i PHARMA UM TE 7 3 Remote device station SWoOO9E consistency status 69 SWoo9F 69 b15 614 b13 612 SW009C SW009D SWO009E SWO009F Stores the line test 1 result 0 Normal 1 Abnormal SWO00B4 6B4 SW00B5 b15 bi4 bi3 bi2 to b2 bi 6B5 SW00B4 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 Listed rou p 14 iS 0 4 8 2 J 1 SWOOB6 SWOOB5 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 6B6 SWOO0B6 47 45 36 35 SWO00B7 SWO00B7 6B74 he li tli 2 It swoops Stores the line test 1 line test 2 result 688 Line test result 0 Normal H Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 7 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q The timing when the data in a link special register SW is updated differs depending on the link register number Table 8 5 lists the update timings of link special registers Table 8 5 Update timing of the link special registers Link special register Data update timing Link special register Data update timing i SW0041 SW0071 Updated independently regardless Updated independently regardless of SB of SB Update after each station is SW0045 SW0072 13 stabilized SWO0060 When SB0060 chan
326. te points 16 16 1 1 067 SL ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant ve I o SL Target station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link x1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC write points 16 16 E1364 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 12 3 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 3 3 Master station lt intelligent device station 1 Master station intelligent device station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master station and a response from an intelligent device station is received Expression Maximum a RIRD value instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 067 ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant qe cH o sspe Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words OT LS X
327. teet 26 RINT Lact ib cinta ai aie 8 REPASET na ie er m tren App 29 RS 232C interface module 2 9 PRW Pesto A 13 PRW Wises dea a e e ak A 13 PRX Led ceret at ved A 12 pn A 12 SB dant E 12 Scan mode setting 8 20 Scan synchronous function 1 9 4 56 Index 3 Selecting a mode according to the system 1 8 T Setting App 41 Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station 1 6 4 28 Slave station cut off function 1 5 4 25 Special function module A 13 Standby master function 1 6 4 29 Standby master station A 12 Standby master station information 8 20 Standby master station number 8 25 Station information setting checklist App 42 Station number overlap checking FUNCIO chori teer re ui a 1 9 4 62 Station number overlap status 8 28 Station number setting 7 13 Station number setting switches 7 5 Station status at error occurrence 5 24 tec te 12 Switch setting sss 7 13 Switch setting status
328. ter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Is the corresponding local station performing data link Do the occupied station number settings for a local station match to the station information for a master station Is data written to the correct address of remote register RWw buffer memory of the master station Is data read from the correct address of remote register RWr buffer memory of the local station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 Check the number of connected modules 51 0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 SW0077 Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Check the LED display on the corresponding local station e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Unable to communicate from the master station remote register RW
329. ter damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In
330. ter receive 8 20 Parameter setting checklist App 41 Parameter setting items 6 3 Parameter setting status 8 20 Parameter setting test result 8 23 Parameter setting with dedicated IISTRUCTION erect orco c Pera 1 5 4 23 Parameter lt 6 1 Part identification nomenclature and settings 7 4 PC interface board 2 9 Performance specification 3 1 Platinum temperature measuring resistor Pt100 temperature input module 2 9 Positioning 2 9 Precautions on programming 8 1 Procedure before starting the data link 7 1 Processing time for dedicated instructions 5 17 Programming 8 1 Random access buffer 8 15 Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at standby master switching 8 18 Index 3 Refresh instruction at standby master Le efe nie pP prep 8 17 Refresh instruction at standby master switching result eese 8 22 Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching 8 18 Refresh instruction w
331. terrupt program can be simulated Example A case where an event is issued when RX01 turns and then an interrupt program is executed Remote device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station number of occupied stations 2 2l222 2 2Ll202l2022 2 2 2 The event issuance 3 The interrupt conditions are program is established 1 Turns on RX01 executed using the GX Developer 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on Automatic CC Link startup By mounting the QJ61BT11 in the system configuration including the remote device station and intelligent device station as well as the remote I O station CC Link startup and complete data refresh can be performed by just turning on the power without creating a sequence program For QJ61BT11 of the function version A it can be used with a system configuration only of the master station and remote I O stations However when the total number of connected stations is less than 64 it is necessary to set the network parameters in order to optimize the link scan time 1 Power ON Reset 5 STOP RUN PCL CPU Master station PLC CPU Master station 2 Identifies QJ61BT11 3 CC Link startup 4 CPU refresh processing Remote l O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station first module 64th module first module 64th module 1 Contents of default parameter settin
332. tes whether there is a temporary error invalid station setting OFF No setting ON Setting exists information is stored in SW007C to SW007F Indicates the parameter receive status from the master station OFF Reception complete ON Reception not complete Detects changes to the host setting switch during data linking OFF No changes detected ON Changes detected Indicates whether the Type setting of the network parameters is set to Master station or Master station Duplex function OFF Master station ON Master station Duplex function Baa pe fe ESES pe fe pe fe fe pe fete pe fede xe Te e px fe fn nee pe fe fe 4 For QJ61BT11 of the function version A it is always OFF 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 3 Link special relay list 5 5 Availability RE Available x Not available Number Name Description _ Onne Offline Master station Local station Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master Host master standby SB007B station 7 b11 master operation btet s OFF Operates as the master station controlling data link ON Operates as the standby master station standby Indicates the communication status between remote local intelligent device standby master stations OFF All stations normal ON Faulty station exists information is stored in SW0080 to SW0083 Other station Indicates the occurr
333. test acceptance status Indicates the module access module operation status OFF Normal Module is operating normally ON Abnormal Module error has occurred Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Startup instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment completion status OFF Not complete ON Startup complete Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master switching have been acknowledged OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master Switching is complete OFF Not executed ON Switching complete Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Stop instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment completion status OFF Not complete ON Stop complete Indicates whether the forced master switching SBOO0C signal can be executed or not OFF Cannot be executed ON Can be executed Indicates the acknowledgment status of remote station temporary error invalid instruction OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgment completion status of remote station temporary error invalid instruction OFF Not executed ON Temporary error invalid station established Specified station number is invalid Indicates the acknowledgment status o
334. the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Description RYO1 to Use prohibited RYOF RY10 Single axis positioning start Pt to 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of the intelligent device station Intelligent device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw f Numeric data such as positioning start number M s r Signal direction Master module gt AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Address Description RWwO Single axis positioning start number RWwl1 Single axis override RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 RWw7 to The data content to be written to the remote registers RWwO to RWwn is predefined for each intelligent device station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Reading from the remote register RWr 8 The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
335. the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote I O station performing remote I O station data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of remote output RY buffer memory Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Is the master station parameter information area being used CPU built in internal parameters Check parameter information SW0067 default parameters correct Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote I O station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station 5 0071 Check the number of connected modules 51 0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Unable to output data from a remote I O station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check the sequence pr
336. the target station number Wait a while and then send the requests transient overload status Wait a while and then send the requests transient overload status 7 j Transient transmission was sent when Wait a while and then B604 Line test in processing X line test was in progress retransmit Transient storage buffer could storage buffer could not be Wait a while and then not be obtained obtained retransmit There is an error in the target station s B607 Target station CPU error CPU 3 Check the target CPU o y Wait a while and then Transient request overload There are too many transient requests to j i retransmit transient overloaded error the corresponding station status The target station was not an intelligent if the target station is an B774 Transient request error n y g device station intelligent device station A response was not received from the Check the requested module Bue Response time out j i EO IL SEE requested station and cables A transient transmission was executed Transient request overload There are too many transient requests to error the corresponding station Transient request overload There are too many transient requests to Bene error the corresponding station W Q O B780 Module mode setting error even though the target station was set to Set to the remote net mode the I O mode Station number specification The t
337. tings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkL Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 v Data link disorder station setting Hold input data 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Setthe input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x m Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 Parameter name m Data link disorder station setting Hold input data Cancel e Setthe number of occupied local stations using Number of exclusive stations Default value Exclusive station 1 Setting range Exclusive station 1 Exclusive station 2 Exclusive station 3 Exclusive station 4 Example Set to Exclusive station 4 Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Number of exclusive stations Data link disorder station setting Hold input data cancel f Set the station type using Type Default value Master station Setting
338. tion station 2 2 Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below je MELSEC series GPP C MELSEC GPPW 060301 Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Project Edit Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help 18 osa S Helen 5 sls ele sale pm E E j up mjo 5 060301 Master statior Program No of boards in 1 rj Boards Blank no setting boards Set by the sequence program comment 1 2 3 4 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 a Operational settings Operational settings Master station X 8 Device memory Master station data link type parameter auto start 4 X 1 amp Device init Mode Online Remote net mode X connectcount 1 Remote input F Remote output AY Remote registe F WA Remote reaister A ww Special relay SB Special reaister S W Retry count 3 Automatic reconnction station count 1 Wait master station No PLC down select Stop X lt Scan mode setting Asynchronous X Delay infomation settings Station information settings Station information Remote device station intial Intalsetinas Interrupt settings d Indispensable settings No setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Alreadyset Setup item details Ackn
339. tion stops and restarts local data links If the data link of the master station is stopped the data link of the entire system stops Setting method Set the CC Link diagnostics in Diagnostics using the GX Developer a Specifying applicable module Specify the module whose data link is stopped or restarted in Unit setting Specification method Unit No address b Execution of data link stop restart Perform these operations by setting Data link start or Data link stop in the network test CC Link diagnostics Eg r Line monitor Host station r Unit setting Link scan time Unit No fi Host station Local station Max 0 Data link status Data linking E ms 10 address 3 ini Action status Normal Minimum ms Switching status Master station Current ms r Network test 3 Using loop cH 0 31 Data link start 0 Line status Normal i CH 1 Line status F d Loop type Twist Single Bus Monitoring other station vp E Monitor stop Acquire the setting information Result Test execute Close After acquiring setting information by turning device Y ni on with Device Test the acquired information can be set as EEPROM Parameters 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 11 Station number overlap checking function This function investigates the status of connected stations and checks for the overlapping numbers of occupied s
340. tive refer to the Section of CC Link Modules in Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module used About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the QJ61BT11 Control amp Communication Link System Master Local Module unless otherwise specified Abbreviation for QJ61BT11 Control amp Communication Link System Master Local QJ61BT11 Module Transmission method by which to periodically communicate the contents of remote and remote registers Transmission method with which the counterpart is specified and 1 1 communication is used at an arbitrary timing Station that controls the data link system One master station is required for each system Station having a PLC CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other local stations Cyclic transmission Transient transmission Master station Local station Remote station that handles bit unit data only Performs input and output with HORDE TEN staton external devices AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65SBTB1 16D Remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data only Performs input and Remote device station output with external devices and analog data conversion AJ65BT 64AD AJe5BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI Generic term for remote I O station and remote device station Controlled by the master station Station that can perform transie
341. tive common negative common shared 24 V DC 5 mA 32 points common high speed response type i MELSEC Q Number of occupied stations For a local station 1 or 4 stations 1 station Station type Master station or local station Remote I O station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AJ65SBTCF1 32D AJ65SBTC4 16D AJ65SBTW4 16D AJ65SBTB3 8D AJ65SBTB3 16D AJ65SBTB2N 8A AJ65SBTB2N 16A AJ65VBTCU3 8D1 AJ65VBTCU3 16D1 AJ65FBTA4 16D AJ65FBTA4 16DE Compact type remote I O module AJ65SBTB1 8T AJ65SBTB1 8TE AJ65SBTB2 8S AJ65SBTB1 16T AJ65SBTB1 16T1 AJ65SBTB1 16TE AJ65SBTB2 16R AJ65SBTB2 16S AJ65SBTB1 32T1 AJ65SBTC1 32T AJ65SBTCF1 32T AJ65SBTB2 8T AJ65SBTB2 16T m Number of occupied Product name Model name Description stations Station type AJ65SBTB1 32T MELSEC Q Table 2 1 Equipment list 2 4 1 line DC input 32 point module positive common negative common shared FCN connector type 24 V DC 5 mA 32 pints common 2 3 4 line DC input 16 point module positive common negative common shared 24 V DC 5 mA 16 points common Waterproof 4 line DC input 16 point module positive common negative common shared 24 V DC 5 mA 16 points common waterproof type ine DC input 8 point module ositive common negative common shared DC 7 mA 8 points common ine DC input 16 point module OSitive common negative common shared 24 V D
342. to XOF YO00 to YOF Y10 to Y1F Data sent from the standby master station to the remote input RX and remote register RWr in the standby master station shown by the shaded areas in the figure above is used as output data when the master station becomes faulty it should be saved in another device using the sequence program When the standby master station becomes faulty the saved data is transferred to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the master station using the sequence program 2 Standby master station input Master station standby Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby master station controlling Station number 0 Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY input RX output RY X00 to RXOF Remote station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 E Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 RX30 to RX3F RYSO to RY3F RX30 to RX3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F LE ERE Rx40to RX4F RY40to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40to BY4E 7 2 f xooto xor Yoo to YoF O to OO TO MOF TOC tO YOU RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RYSF X50 to RX5F 2222777 p X10 t0 X1F Yi0to L Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the master station is being us
343. tored Control data Set data Setting range Setby Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code 51 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 Access code S1 2 Set 0004H 0004H User Attribute code Buffer memor 51 3 Specify the buffer memory start address address Number of points x2 S1 Specify the write data count in word units 1 to 4807 User write App 18 App 18 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the intelligent device station to which data will be written 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be written Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter Interlock signal storage devices Set data 15 to b8b7 to b0 RY Request device 0 to 127 S3 0 0 RY Set the upper 8 bits to 0 00 user Completion device 0 to 127 b15 to 08 b7 to ile RW RX ES Error code storage device 0 to 15 User If none set to FFH 0 Complete with the contents of 1 device RXn 5011 Complete with the contents of 2 devices RXn and mode User RXn 1 RXn 1 turns ON at an abnormal completion x1 The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage device
344. tores the error code see Section 13 3 Details are stored in SW0098 to 9B and SWO009C to 9F 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only x4 This register checks and stores the status only at link startup 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 4 Link special register list 4 7 Availability E mmm Available x Not available Number Name Description Onne Master station Local station SWO06A Stores the switch setting status 66An Switch setting status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 WOO06D gt pena Max link scan time Stores the maximum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units pong Current link scan time Stores the current value of the link scan time in 1 ms units me Min link scan time Stores the minimum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units ECCE Tm Total number of Stores the final station number set in the parameter 6704 stations 1 to 64 stations Stores the maximum station number setting of the station number setting switch that is performing data link 1 to 64 stations SW0072 Number of connected Stores the number of modules that are performing data link 6724 modules SWO0073 Standby master Stores the station number of the standby master station 6734 station number 1 to 64 stations Stores the reserved station setting status 0 Not reserved station 1 Reserved stat
345. tput RY Sendareato Send area to Remote register transmission Data communication between PLC CPUs can be performed in N N mode using remote input RX and remote output RY bit data used in local station systems as well as remote register RWw and remote register RWr word data for writing and reading used in local station systems Master station Network parameters Buffer memory Remote input RX from local Receive area from local to local station No 1 3 local station No 2 to Remote register RWw 3 Send area to 10 D Automatic refresh local station A ii No 1 i 9 Send area to 10 D Automatic refresh local station No 2 to RWr Receive area 13 from local station No 1 Receivearea 13 from local station No 2 Local station station number 1 Buffer memory Remote output RY 2 Host station station number 1 send area Receive area from local station No 2 Remote input Receive area from master station Receive area from master station S to Remote register RWr Receive area from master station Receive area from master e station to 1 1 Remote register RWw Hoststation 13 station number 1 Link scan gt send area Receive 13 station No 2 to Local station station number 2
346. truction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range App 21 App 21 APPENDIX 3 Program example MELSEC Q When M6 is turned ON this program writes one word data to D10 from buffer memory address 1114 of the intelligent device station number 63 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X YOO to X Y1F The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows request device RY4 completion device RX4 error code storage device RWr1 and completion mode 1 Also set the link special register SW refresh device to SWO M6 SW83 E Mov MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV GP RISEND UO DO D10 K63 H4 H111 K1 H4 H104 H1 K11 D1 D2 D3 D4 DS D6 D7 D10 M40 App 22 App 22 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 5 RIFR instruction The RIFR instruction reads the data from the automatic update buffer of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data ee Bs user File pm function register und EN module Instruction Execution i symbol condition Commana RIFR GRIFR Command RIFR GP RIFR Un ni
347. tting Target station number setting Unitl Target No of Target No of 10 Regist procedure p g gist procedure q Regist p Regist p Regist p Regist p End setup Cancel 2 Selecting the Regist procedure Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 1 10 3 2 Setting the regist procedure registration 10 7 Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings In this section AJ65BT 64AD is used as an example for the Regist procedure registration The details to be set are as follows Select Current from Voltage Current the first condition Select the Factory setting of the Offset gain value the second condition Set Average number of times for channel 2 to 50 times the third condition Set Average time for channel 3 to 100 ms the fourth condition Specify Average processing setting for channels 2 and 3 Number of times for channel 2 and Time for channel 3 the fifth condition Set the data format from 2000 to 2000 the sixth condition Set channels 1 to 3 to A D conversion enable the seventh condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the eighth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the ninth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the tenth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the eleventh condition
348. tting range DEC HEX Default DEX 2 Device code Set the device to be used for the event issuance conditions Setting range RX SB RY RWr SW Scan completed 3 Device No Set the device number to be used for the event issuance conditions Setting range When RX or RY is selected 0 to 07FF H When SB or SW is selected 0 to 01FF H When RW is selected 0 to OOFF 4 Detection method Set the detection method for the event issuance conditions Setting range Edge detect Issues event only at rise and fall Level detect Issues each link scan event when the event issuance conditions are established 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 Interrupt condition Set the conditions under which events are issued Setting range When RX SB or RY is selected ON OFF When RWr or SW is selected Equal Unequal 6 Word device Set the conditions under which events are issued when RWw or SW is selected Setting range 0 to 65535 Decimal 0 to FFFF Hexadecimal 7 Interrupt SI No Set the intelligent function module interrupt pointer number Sl is an interrupt pointer for an intelligent function module and not a device used in an actual program Setting range 0 to 15 Interrupt settings Unit 1 Input format DEC m Daca cais Device Detection Interrupt Word Board Interrupt No method condition device E No SI No Riwr M 0004 Level detect Unequal Y 50 1 ELE X v v End setup Cancel 16
349. type in the station information Set to a value between 0 and parameter was set to other than 0 to 2 Write operation was performed to a use prohibited area not used in the buffer memory The number of remote device stations was set to 43 stations or more with the station information parameter 2 Do not write to any of the use prohibited areas not used in the buffer memory Set the remote device station to 42 stations or less with the station information parameter 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 3 5 Detectabilit Error Foch Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action a hexadecimal Master station Local station The number of intelligent device stations Intelligent device station setting including local stations was set to 27 error parameter stations or more with the station information parameter Other than module head station number or station number not specified in the parameter was set with the invalid Set the Head station number of station specification parameter the module lt Example of other than head station Do not specify any of the number gt stations not specified with the A bit other than that for station number 5 parameter was ON for a module occupying 4 stations station numbers 5 to 8 The total size of the communication Set the total size of the Set the intelligent device station to 26 stations or less wit
350. uch as remote READY and initial data processing request flag RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 i i Remote input RX Handshaking signals Such as remote READY and initial data processing request flag i i i i Remote input RX when the AJ65BT 64AD is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT 64AD Master module Device No Signal name RX00 CH1 A D conversion completed flag RX01 CH2 A D conversion completed flag RX02 CH3 A D conversion completed flag RX03 RX04 to Not used RX17 RX19 Initial data setting complete flag RX1C to Not used RX1F 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5 Remote output RY is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations mette E E e enr S 0 5 IR pq eee E ETE Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag Remote output RY RYOF to Rvoo RYOF to RYOO Handshaking signals such RY1F to RY10 5 RY1F to RY10
351. umber of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the Start number of the device in which control data is stared specified device Start number of the device in which slave station setting data is Within the range of the stored specified device Start number of the device in which reserved station Within the range of the Device name specification data is stored specified device Start number of the device in which error invalid station Within the range of the specification data is stored specified device Start number of the device in which send receive and Within the range of the automatic refresh buffer assignment data is stored specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of A Within the range of the reading re specified device D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data When the setting data for S2 to S5 are not to be set specify a dummy device App 29 App 29 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Control data Set data Setting range Setby Stores the status when the instruction is complete 51 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code Specifies whether the individual setting data from S2 to S5 is valid or invalid 0 Invalid 1 Valid 51 1 Setting flag bi5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 0
352. upied 1 to 4 stations R Occupied 4 stations occupied stations Default Occupied 1 station Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Online Remote net mode Online Remote I O net mod al bud net mode Online Remote I O net mode Offline Default Online Remote net mode All connect count 1 1064 module Default 64 Y Device name Select from X M L B D W R or Remote input RX ZR Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R or Remote register RWr ZR Device name Select from M L B T C ST D R t ister RW W Ror ZR Device name Select from L B D W SB PRESIDE or ZR D Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Retry count 1101 times y Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1to 10 module station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station Standby master station No specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select P Stop continue Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode settings Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information settin 0 10 100 0 Nol speed y 9 Default 0 11 6 11 6 Online Remote net mode Special register SW 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STA
353. upies 4 stations JN Terminal resistor 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11 1 1 Setting the master and local stations MELSEC Q Settings of the master station switches are shown below 11 QJ61BT11 RUN MST SD ERR O L RUN S MST RD L ERR STATION NO NC NC DA 2 SLD DB 4 CD DG 6 11 2 Masterson 9 0 Station number setting switch 10 1 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch 0 156 kbps online 11 2 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 Setting the Master Station Parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 11 2 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Input data hold clear Operational settings Hold C clear P g Default Clear M r ion i aster statio Mater station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Online Remote net mode Onlin
354. uses the PLC CPU to run an interrupt Section 4 4 2 Event issuance for the interrupt program Automatic CC Link startup Starts the CC Link automatically by turning the power on Section 4 4 3 Performs communication with all stations remote station local Remote net mode Section 4 4 4 station intelligent device station and standby master station Shortens the link scan time for a system consisting only of the Remote net mode Section 4 4 5 master station and remote I O stations By assigning modules that will be connected in the future as 4 reserved stations they will not be treated as data link faulty Reserved station function mM Section 4 4 6 stations If any of the connected modules is specified it cannot perform data link Prevents modules that may be powered off in the system Error invalid station setting function configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by Section 4 4 7 setting the network parameters Performs link scan by synchronizing with Synchronous mode sequence scan Scan synchronous function p Section 4 4 8 Perform link scan without synchronizing Asynchronous mode with sequence scan Temporary error invalid station Prevents modules specified by GX Developer from being treated ection 4 4 setting function as data link faulty stations temporarily during online operation Data link stop restart Stops or restarts the data link that is being executed Sect
355. using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications CC Link System Master Local Module MODEL QJ61BT1
356. utomatically for each link scan in the buffer memory remote register of all local stations The remote register RWr is used as word data for reading in local station systems 11 The word data stored in the buffer memory remote register RWr is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Station number 2 Local station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU Remote register RWr Remote register RWr Rwo Rwo to J RWt NIE RWr2 SE ANM RWr2 t RWr3 i t RWr3 RWr4 RWr4 i RW 1 Rw oe RWr6 RW6 RWr7 RWI7 RWr8 RWr8 a RWI9 Rw 11 aw awa eee i ft RWB 10 i RWB RWrC RWrC 1 RWD RWD TUNE RWE RWE IE RWF EE RWF RWr10 RWr10 RWrit RWr EIN RWH2 RWri2 RWwri3 RWH3 ZEN RWri4 E RWr4 eoi t 4 a RWrFF 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Word data from a local station to the master and other local stations 12 Word data set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory of the local station However the data is stored only in the area corresponding to its own station number 13 The data in the remote register RWw buffer memory is stored automati
357. vice name Select from M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Online Remote net mode pecial relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR pecial register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR times Default 3 modules Retry count Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10 Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select P Stop continue Default Stop Y Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode setting Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous 0 to 100 0 Not specified Default 0 Q o c 5 Standby master station No Delay information settings App 41 App 41 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 2 Station information setting checklist Station information setting checklist Exclusive buffer select Word Reserve invalid Station No Station type station i station select Automatic 42 42 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Exclusive TE eei buffer select Word Reserve invalid Station No Station type station station select mee Automatic 43 43 APPENDIX Appendix 6 3 Device assignment checklist MELSEC Q Device assignment checklist Station No RX00 to RX1F RY00 to RYIF gt RWwO to RWw3 gt RWO to RWr3 gt RX20 to RX3F RY20 to RY3F RWw4 to RWw7 gt RWr4 to RWr7 gt RX40 to RX5F RY40 to RY5F gt R
358. w to a local station remote register RWr Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check the LED display on the corresponding local Is the corresponding local station performing data station link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of remote Check the sequence program register RWw buffer memory of the local station Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Unable to communicate from a local station remote Is data read from the correct address of remote Check the sequence program register RWw to the master station remote register RWr register RWr buffer memory of the master station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station 5 0071 Check the number of connected modules SW0072 13 6 13 6 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status station SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the lo
359. within the specified range Is the RD LED lit Is the communication cable wired properly Correct the communication cable wiring Corresponding module malfunction Y Y Y To next page To next page To next page x1 Check for short circuits reversed connection disconnection terminal resistors FG connection overall distance and distance between stations 13 1 13 13 TROUBLESHOOTING From previous page Is the SD LED lit flashing From previous page From previous page Is the transmission rate setting correct Set the correct transmission rate Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch Is the communication cable wired properly 1 Wire the communication cable properly Corresponding module malfunction baud rate switch Are the station MELSEC Q lumber switches set properly Are there any station numbers that are completely matched 3 Set the correct station numbers Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch The master station already exists Reset the module to operate as the standby master station Corresponding module malfunction station number switch 2 Incomplete match Occupying 2 ___ stations or more Station Station number number n nad Station
360. y Link special registers SW The following describes the link special registers SW relating to the standby master function The figures in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer memory addresses Table 4 6 List of link special registers relating to the standby master function SW0043 6434 SW005D 65D Refresh instruction at standby master switching result Forced master switching instruction result Applicability O Applicable x Not applicable Master station Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby master switching 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction with SBOOOC 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 SW0073 Standby master station Stores the station number of the standby master station 673 number 1 to 64 station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 Onvoff timings of link special relays SB relating to the standby master function The following shows the on off timings of the link special relays SB relating to the standby master function SB70 Master station information SB7B Host master standby master operation status SB5A Master switching request acknowledgment SB5B Master switching request complete SBO01 User operation Refresh instruction at standby master switching SB42 Refresh instruction acknowl
361. y master transferred to the standby master station 5E0n b1 switching OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Stops the host data link However when the master station executes this the entire system Data link stop will stop OFF No stop instruction ON Stop instructed Refresh instruction Instructs to refresh cyclic data after changing parameters by the 580003 when changing RLPASET instruction 5 0 b3 parameters by the OFF Not instructed stop refreshing dedicated instruction ON Instructed start continue refreshing Establishes the stations specified by SW0003 SW0007 as 580004 Temporary error temporary error invalid stations 5E0n 64 invalid request OFF Not requested ON Requested Cancels the temporary error invalid status of stations specified by SW0003 SW0007 OFF Not requested ON Requested Executes line tests for the stations specified by SW0008 580008 b8 Line test request OFF Not requested ON Requested Reads the parameter setting information for the actual system SB0009 Parameter information configuration 0 69 read request OFF Normal ON Abnormal SB0002 5 0 b2 Temporary error invalid canceling request 580005 5 65 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 3 Link special relay list 2 5 Availability Available x Not ago Number Name Description Oie ome Master station Local station Forcefully transfers the

CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents